Kyocera Copier FS 1028MFP User Manual
OPERATION GUIDE  
FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Thank you for your purchase of FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP.  
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and  
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.  
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy  
reference.  
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of  
third party supplies in this machine.  
This Operation Guide also includes instructions on FS-1028MFP/DP.  
Included Guides  
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.  
Operation Guide (This Guide)  
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Conventions in This Guide  
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect  
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The  
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.  
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result  
from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the  
related points.  
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage  
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance  
with the related points.  
Symbols  
The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are  
indicated inside the symbol.  
.... [General warning]  
.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]  
.... [Warning of high temperature]  
The  
symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the  
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.  
.... [Warning of prohibited action]  
.... [Disassembly prohibited]  
The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.  
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.  
.... [Alert of required action]  
.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]  
[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground  
connection]  
....  
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide  
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).  
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases  
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v  
Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi  
Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii  
Laser Safety (Europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii  
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii  
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv  
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii  
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
1
2
Part Names  
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Preparation before Use  
Check bundled items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28  
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
3
Basic Operation  
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Message Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28  
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31  
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32  
Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33  
4
Copying Functions  
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
ii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
5
Sending Functions  
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Sending Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Duplex Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Original Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Subject and Body Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19  
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21  
FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23  
Sanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24  
6
7
Document Box  
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Status / Job Cancel  
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Sending the Job Log History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
8
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56  
Sending Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62  
Document Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66  
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69  
Printing Reports/Sending Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81  
Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87  
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92  
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112  
Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127  
Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128  
Network Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-138  
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-146  
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-150  
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-151  
OPERATION GUIDE  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Maintenance  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
10  
Troubleshooting  
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
11  
Management  
User Login Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13  
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37  
Appendix  
Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2  
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-5  
Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-9  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-18  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-23  
Index  
iv  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution / Warning Labels  
Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be  
sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.  
Laser inside the machine  
(Laser radiation warning)  
For U.S.A. and  
Canada  
For Europe, Asia, and  
other countries  
High temperature inside. Do not  
touch parts in this area, because  
there is a danger of getting burned.  
NOTE: Do not remove these labels.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation Precautions  
Environment  
CAUTION  
Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause  
the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage  
to the machine.  
Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean  
the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock.  
Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to  
avoid the danger of fire.  
To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as  
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly  
ventilated out of the machine.  
500 mm  
(19 11/16")  
300 mm  
(11 13/16")  
300 mm  
(11 13/16")  
300 mm  
(11 13/16")  
1000 mm  
(39 3/8")  
Other precautions  
The service environmental conditions are as follows:  
•
•
Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)  
Humidity: 15 to 80 %  
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when  
selecting a site for the machine.  
•
•
•
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.  
Avoid locations with vibrations.  
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.  
vi  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.  
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.  
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be  
damaged.  
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,  
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an  
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment  
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.  
Power supply/Grounding the machine  
WARNING  
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the  
same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.  
Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A  
buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may  
cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition.  
Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or  
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service  
representative.  
Other precautions  
Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine.  
Handling of plastic bags  
WARNING  
Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their  
nose and mouth causing suffocation.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions for Use  
Cautions when using the machine  
WARNING  
Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near  
the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside.  
Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high  
voltage parts inside the machine.  
Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord,  
pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger  
of fire or electrical shock.  
Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury,  
fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing  
blindness.  
If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or  
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power  
switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact  
your service representative.  
If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power  
switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or  
electrical shock. Then contact your service representative.  
Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock.  
Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.  
viii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may  
become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when  
removing the power cord from the outlet.)  
Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is  
damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock.  
Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine.  
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power  
switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the  
power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning the  
machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.  
For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning  
operations.  
If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore  
recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts.  
This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your  
service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine.  
Other precautions  
Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine.  
Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying.  
When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative.  
Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static  
electricity.  
Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide.  
Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may  
result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cautions when handling consumables  
CAUTION  
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause  
burns.  
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.  
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion,  
as well as contact with your eyes and skin.  
•
•
•
•
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of  
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.  
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the  
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.  
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining  
tenderness, contact a physician.  
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.  
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.  
If using the FS-1128MFP the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the  
main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.  
x
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other precautions  
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The  
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant  
regulations.  
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.  
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of  
temperature and humidity.  
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi  
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Safety (Europe)  
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this  
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the  
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.  
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.  
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.  
The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine.  
xii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe)  
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional  
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.  
VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur  
Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß im Gerät zu unterbrechen.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
TO  
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EEC, 93/68/EEC and 1999/5/EC  
We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this  
declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications.  
EN55024  
EN55022 Class B  
EN61000-3-2  
EN61000-3-3  
EN60950-1  
EN60825-1  
EN300 330-1  
EN300 330-2  
TBR21  
Radio Frequency Transmitter  
This machine contains the transmitter module. We, the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in  
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Radio Tag Technology  
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject  
to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.  
NOTE: Product marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the  
European Parliament and Council Directive 2006/66/EC (the "Battery Directive") in European Union.  
Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)  
1. Safety of laser beam  
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance  
standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This  
indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical  
system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser  
beam to escape.  
2. The CDRH Act  
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological  
Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in  
the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown  
below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the  
United States. On this machine, the label is on the rear.  
xiv  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Optical unit  
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is  
the label located on the cover of the optical unit.  
4. Maintenance  
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA)  
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional  
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.  
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les  
interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors  
tension.  
WARNING  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try  
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
•
•
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.  
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.  
Radio Tag Technology  
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to  
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.  
MERCURY WARNING  
THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF  
ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.  
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)  
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may  
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
xvi  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Warranty (USA)  
FS-1028MFP/FS-1128MFP  
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY  
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant  
the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories  
installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for  
a period of one (1) year, or 100,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In  
the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s  
only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.  
Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.  
This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the  
original MFP for a period of three years or 100,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs.  
Maintenance Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit.  
Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.  
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new  
Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.  
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized  
Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide  
service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera  
Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at www.kyoceramita.com/us.  
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to  
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,  
(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have  
been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera  
Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.  
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,  
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is  
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.  
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY  
OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS  
WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY  
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR  
INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning  
•
•
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.  
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low.  
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/  
scanned.  
Paper money  
Bank note  
Securities  
Stamp  
Passport  
Certificate  
•
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.  
xviii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal and Safety Information  
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on  
the following topics.  
• Legal Information ........................................................... xx  
• Regarding Trade Names............................................... xxi  
• Energy Saving Control Function .................................. xxv  
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................... xxv  
• Paper Recycling........................................................... xxv  
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.................... xxv  
• About this Operation Guide..........................................xxvi  
• Conventions in This Guide..........................................xxvii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Information  
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita  
Corporation is prohibited.  
xx  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Regarding Trade Names  
•
•
•
PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.  
KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.  
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.  
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.  
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.  
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.  
AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado™ by Wind River  
Systems, Inc.  
•
•
•
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
®
TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank .  
All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype  
Imaging Inc.  
•
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.  
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered  
trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.  
®
•
•
UFST™ MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.  
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.  
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The  
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GPL  
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access  
“http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.  
Open SSLeay License  
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1
2
3
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgment:  
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/  
/www.openssl.org/)”  
4
The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without prior written permission.  
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.  
5
6
Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their  
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
xxii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Original SSLeay License  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was  
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.  
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;  
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright  
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.  
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library  
used.  
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided  
with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1
2
3
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement:  
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”  
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic  
related :-).  
4
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application  
code) you must include an acknowledgement:  
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be  
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU  
Public Licence.]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monotype Imaging License Agreement  
1
2
Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a  
special format as well as the UFST Software.  
You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles  
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary  
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype  
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three  
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-  
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all  
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a  
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.  
3
4
5
To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other  
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable  
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.  
You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup  
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the  
original.  
This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.  
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License  
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this  
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the  
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.  
6
7
You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the  
Software.  
Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in  
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in  
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,  
errors and omissions.  
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a  
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.  
8
9
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and  
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.  
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or  
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and  
Typefaces.  
Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.  
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior  
written consent of Monotype Imaging.  
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in  
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or  
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions  
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).  
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms  
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this  
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized  
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and  
conditions of this Agreement.  
xxiv  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Energy Saving Control Function  
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain  
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions  
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the  
device within a set amount of time.  
Low Power Mode  
The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 2 minutes have passed since the device was last used.  
The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For  
more information refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4.  
Sleep  
The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The  
amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information  
see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5.  
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function  
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto  
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information  
see Duplex Copying on page 3-14.  
Paper Recycling  
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service  
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.  
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program  
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that  
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About this Operation Guide  
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.  
Chapter 1 - Part Names  
Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.  
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use  
Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.  
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation  
Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.  
Chapter 4 - Copying Functions  
Describes the functions you can use when copying.  
Chapter 5 - Sending Functions  
Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.  
Chapter 6 - Document Box  
Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.  
Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel  
Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.  
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission  
Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)  
Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.  
Chapter 9 - Maintenance  
Describes cleaning and toner replacement.  
Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting  
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.  
Chapter 11 - Management  
Explains user login administration and job accounting.  
Also describes the procedure for Data Security Kit installation.  
Appendix  
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.  
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.  
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.  
xxvi  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Conventions in This Guide  
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.  
Convention  
Bold  
Description  
Example  
Press the Start key.  
Indicates the operation panel  
keys or a computer screen.  
[Regular]  
Indicates a selection item on the Select [System].  
Message Display.  
Italic  
Indicates a message displayed  
on the Message Display.  
Ready to copy is displayed.  
Used to emphasize a key word,  
phrase or references to  
additional information.  
For more information refer to Sleep and  
Auto Sleep on page 3-5.  
Note  
Indicates supplemental  
information or operations for  
reference.  
NOTE:  
Important  
Caution  
Indicates items that are required  
or prohibited so as to avoid  
problems.  
IMPORTANT:  
Indicates what must be  
observed to prevent injury or  
machine breakdown and how to  
deal with it.  
CAUTION:  
OPERATION GUIDE  
xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xxviii  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Part Names  
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.  
• Operation Panel............................................................1-2  
• Machine ........................................................................1-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Part Names  
Operation Panel  
Displays the Address Book screen, where you can add, edit and delete destinations.  
Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a  
Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen,  
where you can check the system settings and  
counters.  
pause when entering a FAX number.*  
Displays the Confirm Destination screen, where you can edit and  
delete destinations.  
Displays the Add Destination screen, where you can add  
destinations.  
Displays the Status screen, where you  
can check the status, print a status  
report, and pause or cancel the job in  
process.  
Switches between on-hook and off-hook when  
manually sending a FAX.*  
Displays the Copy  
screen, where you can  
make settings required  
for copying.  
Message Display. Check what is  
shown here while operating the  
machine.  
Selects the menu displayed  
at the lower right in the  
Message Display.  
Displays the FAX screen, where  
you can send a FAX.*  
Blinks while data  
is transmitted.  
Blinks during printing  
operation.  
Displays the Send screen, where you can send an e-mail,  
folder (SMB/FTP) or FAX.*  
Selects the menu displayed  
at the lower left in the  
Message Display.  
Displays the Document Box screen, where you can  
operate the document box and USB memory.  
Used to call destinations registered to  
the one-touch key numbers (1 to 22).  
Shifts to switch the one-touch key numbers  
(1 to 11 and 12 to 22).  
Lamp is lit while shifted (12 to 22).  
*
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
1-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PartNames  
1
Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when  
entering characters, change a value, etc.  
Clears entered numbers and characters.  
Resets settings and displays the  
basic screen.  
Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered  
value.  
Turns the machine on/off. Also used  
to put it into or recover it from sleep  
mode.  
Displays the function menu for copy,  
print, transmission and document box.  
Lit when the machine's  
main power is on.  
Numeric keys. Enter  
numbers and symbols.  
Ends operation  
(logs out) on the  
Administration screen.  
Returns the Message Display to the  
previous screen.  
Used to register or recall  
programs.  
Lights or blinks when an error occurs.  
Cancels the printing job in progress.  
Blinks while the machine is accessing the memory.  
Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for  
setting operations.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
Machine  
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Original Cover (For FS-1028MFP only)  
Platen  
Original Size Indicator Plate  
Operation Panel  
Top Cover  
Front Cover  
Drum Unit  
Main Charger Cleaner  
Lock Lever  
10 Toner Container  
1-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PartNames  
1
11  
12  
13  
16  
16  
14  
15  
17  
18  
11 Top Tray  
12 Paper Length Guide  
13 Paper Stopper  
14 Paper Width Guides  
15 Cassette  
16 Paper Width Guides (MP Tray)  
17 MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray  
18 MP Tray Extension  
OPERATION GUIDE  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
19  
20  
22  
23  
21  
24  
19 Anchor Pin  
20 USB Interface Connector  
21 Network Interface Connector  
22 Rear Cover  
23 Main Power Switch  
24 Power Cord Connector  
1-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Preparation before Use  
This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well  
as the procedures for loading papers and originals.  
•
Check bundled items .........................................................2-2  
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables.......2-3  
•
• Connecting Cables........................................................2-5  
• Switching the Language for Display [Language]...........2-7  
• Setting Date and Time ..................................................2-9  
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ....................2-12  
• Installing Software.......................................................2-24  
• COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ................2-25  
• Sending E-mail............................................................2-26  
• Loading Paper.............................................................2-28  
• Loading Originals........................................................2-44  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
Check bundled items  
Check that the following items have been bundled.  
•
•
•
Printed material  
CD-ROM(Product Library)  
CD-ROM(TWAIN compatible application)  
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM  
The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.  
Documents  
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide  
Printer Driver User Guide  
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide  
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide  
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference  
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference  
2-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables  
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.  
Connection Example  
2
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.  
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network  
cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)  
COMMAND CENTER  
Network  
Send E-mail  
Administrator’s  
PC  
Network settings, Scanner  
default settings, User and  
destination registration  
Sends the image data  
of scanned originals to  
the desired recipient  
as a file attached to an  
E-mail message.  
MFP  
Printing  
Network  
Send SMB  
USB  
Saves the scanned  
image as a data file on  
your PC.  
Network  
Network  
Network FAX  
Network  
Send FTP  
Sends the scanned  
image as a data file on  
the FTP.  
FAX  
TWAIN Scanning  
WIA Scanning  
FAX  
USB  
USB  
*
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
TWAIN and WIA are  
standardized interface  
for communication  
between software  
applications and image  
acquisition devices.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
Preparing Necessary Cables  
The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables  
according to the interface you use.  
Available Standard Interfaces  
Function  
Interface  
Necessary Cable  
LAN (10Base-T or  
Printer/Scanner  
/Network FAX*  
Network interface  
100Base-TX, Shielded)  
Printer/TWAIN  
Scanning/WIA  
Scanning  
USB interface  
USB2.0 compatible cable  
(Hi-Speed USB compliant,  
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)  
*
Network FAX and FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP. For  
details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.  
2-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
Connecting Cables  
Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine.  
1
Turn the main power switch off (O).  
2
2
Connect the machine to the PC or your network  
device. When using the network interface, remove  
the cap..  
3
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the  
machine and the other end to a power outlet.  
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
4
Turn the main power switch on (|). The machine  
begins to warm up.  
5
When connecting the network cable, configure the  
network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN  
Cable Connection) on page 2-12.  
2-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Switching the Language for Display [Language]  
Select the language displayed on the Message Display.  
Use the procedure below to select the language.  
2
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
5
User Property  
Common Settings  
6
*********************  
7
Copy  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Language].  
Press the OK key. Language appears.  
Language:  
*English  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Deutsch  
Français  
6
Press the U or V key to select the desired  
language and then press the OK key.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Common Settings menu.  
2-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Setting Date and Time  
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.  
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the  
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine  
is used.  
2
NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.  
1
Turn on the main power switch.  
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
5
User Property  
Common Settings  
6
*********************  
7
Copy  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting].  
A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID  
and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
7
Press the OK key. The Date Setting menu appears.  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Date/Time  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone].  
Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.  
Time Zone  
:
a b  
1
*********************  
-12:00 Internati  
2
3
-11:00 Midway  
-10:00 Hawaii  
10 Press the U or V key to select your region and  
then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Date Setting menu.  
11 Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time].  
Date Setting:  
a b  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
4
*********************  
Summer Time  
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.  
Summer Time:  
*Off  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
On  
13 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and  
then press the OK key.  
2-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Date Setting menu.  
14 Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time].  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
2
1
Date/Time  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
15 Press the OK key. Date/Time appears.  
Date/Time:  
a b  
Year Month Day  
2009 01 01  
(Time Zone:Tokyo )  
16 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,  
press the U or V key to enter year, month and day,  
and then press the OK key.  
17 Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,  
press the U or V key to enter hours, minutes and  
seconds, and then press the OK key.  
Date/Time:  
Hour Min. Second  
11: 45: 50  
(Time Zone:Tokyo )  
a b  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Date Setting menu.  
18 Press the U or V key to select [Date Format].  
Date Setting:  
Date/Time  
Date Format  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
3
19 Press the OK key. Date Format appears.  
Date Format:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Month/Day/Year  
2
3
Day/Month/Year  
Year/Month/Day  
20 Press the U or V key to select the desired display  
format and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Date Setting menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)  
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP  
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,  
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.  
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings,  
refer to Network Setup on page 8-128.  
•
•
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup ...2-12  
AppleTalk Setup ...2-22  
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)  
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway  
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off".  
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.  
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
2-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have  
logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges.  
The default settings of the login user name and login  
password are both 2800.  
Administrator only.  
2
If you have logged in using a user ID without  
administrator privileges, the screen will display  
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.  
3
In the System menu, press the U or V key to select  
[Network Setting].  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].  
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu  
appears.  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
1
*********************  
2
3
IPv4 Setting  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].  
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.  
TCP/IP:  
Off  
*On  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the TCP/IP Settings menu.  
10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
IPv4 Setting  
1
2
*********************  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
3
11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.  
IPv4 Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
DHCP  
2
3
Bonjour  
IP Address  
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].  
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.  
DHCP:  
Off  
*On  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
14 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the IPv4 Setting menu.  
15 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour].  
IPv4 Setting:  
DHCP  
Bonjour  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
IP Address  
[ Exit ]  
16 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.  
Bonjour:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
2-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
17 Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the IPv4 Setting menu.  
2
18 Press the U or V key to select [IP Address].  
19 Press the OK key. IP Address appears.  
20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address.  
IPv4 Setting:  
a b  
1
2
DHCP  
Bonjour  
3
*********************  
IP Address  
[ Exit ]  
IP Address:  
a b  
123.145.167.189  
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position  
horizontally.  
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter  
the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between  
000 and 255.  
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is  
[On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be  
changed.  
IP Address:  
b
123.145.167.189  
When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting  
(page 2-18) to Off.  
21 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.  
22 Press the U or V key to select [Subnet Mask].  
IPv4 Setting:  
a b  
3
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
4
*********************  
5
Default Gateway  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
23 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears.  
Subnet Mask:  
a b  
123.145.167.189  
24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask.  
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position  
horizontally.  
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter  
the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between  
000 and 255.  
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is  
[On], the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot  
be changed.  
When setting an Subnet Mask, set the DHCP Setting  
(page 2-18) to Off.  
25 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.  
26 Press the U or V key to select [Default Gateway].  
27 Press the OK key. Default Gateway appears.  
28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway.  
IPv4 Setting:  
a b  
3
4
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
5
*********************  
Default Gateway  
[ Exit ]  
Default Gateway: a b  
123.145.167.189  
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position  
horizontally.  
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter  
the Default Gateway. Each 3 digits can be set  
between 000 and 255.  
2-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-18) is  
[On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and  
cannot be changed.  
2
When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP  
Setting (page 2-18) to Off.  
29 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
DHCP Settings  
Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On.  
Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have  
logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges.  
Administrator only.  
If you have logged in using a user ID without  
administrator privileges, the screen will display  
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.  
3
In the System menu, press the U or V key to select  
[Network Setting].  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
2-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparation before Use  
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
2
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].  
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu  
appears.  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
1
*********************  
2
3
IPv4 Setting  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].  
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.  
TCP/IP:  
Off  
a b  
1
2 *On  
*********************  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the TCP/IP Settings menu.  
10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
1
TCP/IP  
IPv4 Setting  
2
*********************  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
3
11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.  
IPv4 Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
DHCP  
2
3
Bonjour  
IP Address  
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.  
DHCP:  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Off  
*On  
14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and  
then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the IPv4 Setting menu.  
Bonjour Settings  
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.  
Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have  
logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges.  
Administrator only.  
If you have logged in using a user ID without  
administrator privileges, the screen will display  
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.  
2-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
3
4
In the System menu, press the U or V key to select  
[Network Setting].  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
2
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].  
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu  
appears.  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
1
*********************  
2
3
IPv4 Setting  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].  
Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.  
TCP/IP:  
Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
*On  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the TCP/IP Settings menu.  
10 Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
IPv4 Setting  
1
2
*********************  
3
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.  
IPv4 Setting:  
DHCP  
Bonjour  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
IP Address  
3
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour].  
13 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.  
Bonjour:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
14 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and  
then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the IPv4 Setting menu.  
AppleTalk Setup  
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.  
Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preparation before Use  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3
*********************  
System  
2
[ Exit ]  
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have  
logged in using a user ID with administrator privileges.  
Administrator only.  
If you have logged in using a user ID without  
administrator privileges, the screen will display  
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.  
3
4
In the System menu, press the U or V key to select  
[Network Setting].  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [AppleTalk].  
Press the OK key. AppleTalk appears.  
AppleTalk  
Off  
*On  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and  
then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Network Setting menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Installing Software  
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want  
to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your  
PC.  
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP, Windows 2000, Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user  
logged on with administrator privileges.  
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep  
Mode before continuing. See Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5.  
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
2-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparation before Use  
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)  
COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing  
the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.  
2
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer  
to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.  
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below.  
1
2
Launch your Web browser.  
In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.  
E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/  
The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their  
current status.  
3
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be  
set separately.  
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct password to access pages other  
than the startup page. The default setting is admin00. The password can be changed.  
For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preparation before Use  
Sending E-mail  
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.  
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.  
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:  
•
•
The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server  
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.  
SMTP Settings  
Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.  
If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.  
Sender address  
•
•
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.  
1
Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.  
2-26  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
2
Enter the correct settings in each field.  
The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.  
Item  
Description  
2
SMTP Protocol  
Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be  
enabled.  
SMTP Port Number  
SMTP Server Name  
Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.  
Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the  
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS  
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be  
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.  
SMTP Server Timeout Enter the default time out for the server in seconds.  
Authentication  
Protocol  
Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP  
as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.  
Authenticate as  
Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a  
different account.  
Login User Name  
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be  
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is  
64 characters.  
Login Password  
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for  
authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.  
POP before SMTP  
Timeout  
Enter the timeout (in seconds) if you chose POP before SMTP as the  
Authentication Protocol.  
Test  
This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.  
E-mail Size Limit  
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is  
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.  
Sender Address  
Signature  
Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the  
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person  
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for  
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is  
128 characters.  
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of  
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The  
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.  
Domain Restriction  
Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length  
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.  
3
Click Submit.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Loading Paper  
Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as  
an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).  
Before Loading Paper  
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets  
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following  
steps.  
1
2
3
4
Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the  
middle.  
Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while  
keeping the entire stack swelled.  
Raise the right and left hands alternately to create  
a gap and feed air between the papers.  
Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.  
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before  
loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a  
jam.  
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already  
used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or  
clipped together. This may damage the machine or  
cause poor image quality.  
NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,  
turn the stack in the cassette upside down.  
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures  
and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of  
problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading  
in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the  
paper storage bag.  
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged  
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing  
it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper  
storage bag.  
NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead,  
paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or  
company name, refer to Paper on Appendix-9.  
2-28  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preparation before Use  
Loading Paper in the Cassettes  
The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.  
2
The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m ).  
2
The following paper sizes are supported: Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Executive, Statement, A4, B5, A5, A6, Folio,  
and 16K.  
IMPORTANT:  
•
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may  
cause paper jams or other faults.)  
•
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the  
media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38)  
2
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g/m .  
2
•
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g/m in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper  
that is heavier than 120 g/m .  
2
1
Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.  
IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the  
machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.  
2
Press the bottom plate down until it locks.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparation before Use  
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides  
located on the left and right sides of the cassette.  
Press the paper width adjusting tab on the left  
guide and slide the guides to the paper size  
required.  
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.  
4
Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size  
required.  
If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4,  
pull out the extension paper cassette by pushing  
the release lever one by one and adjust it to the  
desired paper size.  
2-30  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
5
Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to  
be printed is facing down and the paper is not  
folded, curled, or damaged.  
2
IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle  
mark located on the width guide.  
•
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not  
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may  
cause paper jams.  
•
•
•
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the  
level indicator (see illustration below).  
When loading the paper, keep the side that was  
closest the package seal facing up.  
The paper length and width guides must be  
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper  
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed  
feeding and paper jams.  
•
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest  
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,  
readjust the guides to fit the paper.  
6
Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the  
machine. Push it straight in as far as it will go.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
There is a paper gauge on the left side of the front  
of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining  
paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the pointer  
will go down to the level of (empty).  
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged  
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it  
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage  
bag.  
7
Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded  
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size  
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38.)  
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray  
2
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m ).  
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R, and 16K.  
Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.  
IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always  
specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on  
2
page 2-41.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m or more, set the media type to Thick.  
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.  
2
•
•
•
•
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m ), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets  
Hagaki: 15 sheets  
OHP film: 1 sheet  
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 1 sheet  
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and  
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41.  
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to  
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41.  
2-32  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparation before Use  
1
Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.  
2
2
Pull out the subtray.  
3
Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP  
tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP  
tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes,  
slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
4
Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as  
far as it will go.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the  
package seal facing up.  
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.  
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.  
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check  
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous  
job before loading the paper. If there is just a small  
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and  
you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper  
from the tray and include it with the new paper before  
loading the paper back into the tray.  
Loading Envelopes  
1 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.  
Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.  
Acceptable Envelope  
Size  
Hagaki  
148×100 (mm)  
148×200 (mm)  
162×114 (mm)  
235×105 (mm)  
3 7/8"×7 1/2"  
4 1/8"×9 1/2"  
110×220 (mm)  
162×229 (mm)  
7 1/4"×10 1/2"  
3 7/8"×8 7/8"  
3 5/8"×6 1/2"  
176×250 (mm)  
Oufuku Hagaki  
Youkei 2  
Youkei 4  
Monarch  
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10)  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Executive  
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9)  
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4)  
ISO B5  
2-34  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparation before Use  
1
Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.  
2
2
Pull out the subtray.  
3
Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP  
tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP  
tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper sizes,  
slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
4
Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as  
far as it will go.  
5
For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.  
Insert the envelope all the way along the width  
guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the  
edge with the flap facing towards you.  
For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert  
the envelope all the way along the width guides,  
keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with  
the flap facing the insertion slot.  
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray  
Load envelope with the print side facing up.  
Close the flap.  
Landscape form envelopes  
Portrait form envelopes  
Cardstock (Hagaki)  
Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)  
NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).  
2-36  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and  
facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be  
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be  
done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.  
2
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose  
tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying  
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose  
Tray on page 2-41.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Specifying Paper Size and Media  
The default paper size setting for cassette, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2  
and 3) is [Letter], and the default media type setting is [Plain].  
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to  
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-38.)  
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying  
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-41.)  
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes  
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3), specify the paper  
size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.  
Selection Item  
Selectable Size/Type  
Paper Size  
Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper  
sizes are as follows.  
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II  
Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, and 16K  
Media Type  
Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,  
Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality and  
Custom 1~8*  
*
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper  
Weight on page 8-17.  
NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.  
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2-38  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
User Property  
Common Settings  
5
6
*********************  
Copy  
7
2
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1  
Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].  
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when  
the optional cassettes are installed.  
Follow the steps below when you select the main  
unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar  
fashion when you select an optional cassette  
(Cassette 2 or 3).  
7
8
Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu  
appears.  
Cassette 1 Set.  
:
a b  
1
*********************  
Cassette 1 Size  
2
Cassette 1 Type  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
9
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.  
Cassette 1 Size  
:
a b  
*********************  
1
*Letter  
a
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
a
a
10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
size and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Cassette 1 Set. menu.  
11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type].  
Cassette 1 Set.  
:
a b  
1
Cassette 1 Size  
2 Cassette 1 Type  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.  
Cassette 1 Type: a b  
1
*********************  
*Plain  
2
3
Rough  
Recycled  
13 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
type and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Cassette 1 Set. menu.  
2-40  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray  
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a  
plain paper, specify the media type.  
2
Item  
Description  
Paper Standard Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes  
Size  
Sizes  
are as follows.  
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, and Oficio  
II  
Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K  
Others  
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.  
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.  
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9  
(Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),  
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2  
Size  
Entry  
Enter the size not included in the standard size.  
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.  
Inch size  
X (Horizontal): 5.83~14.02" (in 0.01" increments),  
Y (Vertical): 2.75~8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Metric size  
X (Horizontal): 148~356 mm (in 1mm increments),  
Y (Vertical): 80~216 mm (in 1mm increments)  
Media Type  
Selectable media types are as follows.  
Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,  
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched,  
Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality and Custom  
1~8*  
*
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page  
8-17.  
NOTE: If using the FS-1128MFP and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available  
media types are as shown below.  
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparation before Use  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
5
User Property  
Common Settings  
6
*********************  
7
Copy  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].  
Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu  
appears.  
MP Tray Set.:  
MP Tray Size  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
MP Tray Type  
[ Exit ]  
8
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size].  
2-42  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
9
Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.  
MP Tray Size:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Letter  
a
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
a
a
2
10 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
Others:  
a b  
*********************  
size and then press the OK key.  
1
*ISO B5  
a
If you select [Others], select one of the other  
options and then press the OK key.  
2
3
Envelope #10  
Envelope #9  
If you select [Size Entry], use the numeric keys to  
enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key,  
and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the  
OK key.  
Size Entry(Y):  
(5.83 - 14.02)  
D b  
x
***11.49*"  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the MP Tray Set. menu.  
11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type].  
MP Tray Set.:  
MP Tray Size  
a b  
1
2 MP Tray Type  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.  
MP Tray Type:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Plain  
2
3
Transparency  
Rough  
13 Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
type and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the MP Tray Set. menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation before Use  
Loading Originals  
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.  
Placing Originals on the Platen  
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.  
1
Open the original cover.  
NOTE: If the optional document processor (DP-110) is  
installed, open the document processor. Before  
opening the document processor, be sure that there  
are no originals left on the original table or on the  
original eject table. Originals left on the original table or  
on the original eject table may fall off when the  
document processor is opened.  
Keep the document processor open if the original is 30  
mm or thicker.  
2
Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown  
and align it flush against the original size indicator  
plates with the back left corner as the reference  
point.  
3
Close the original cover.  
IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully  
when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the  
platen glass.  
Do not close the document processor when the original  
is 30 mm or thicker. The connector of the document  
processor will be removed form the machine.  
NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges  
and in the middle of open-faced originals.  
CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open  
as there is a danger of personal injury.  
2-44  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
Loading Originals in the Document Processor  
The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided  
originals are scanned.  
2
Part Names of the Document Processor  
(1) Top cover  
(1)  
(2)  
(2) Original width guides  
(3)  
(3) Original table  
(4)  
(5)  
(4) Original eject table  
(5) Original stopper  
(6) Opening handle  
(6)  
Originals Supported by the Document Processor  
The document processor supports the following types of originals.  
2
2
Weight  
Size  
50 to 120 g/m (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m )  
Maximum A4 to Minimum A5  
Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement  
Capacity  
Plain paper, Colored paper, Recycled paper,  
High quality paper: 50 sheets  
2
Thick paper (110 g/m ): 36 sheets  
2
Thick paper (120 g/m ): 33 sheets  
Art paper: 1 sheet  
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor  
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Soft originals such as vinyl sheets  
Transparencies such as OHP film  
Carbon paper  
Originals with very slippery surfaces  
Originals with adhesive tape or glue  
Wet originals  
Originals with correction fluid which is not dried  
Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals  
Originals with cut-out sections  
Crumpled paper  
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).  
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases  
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).  
OPERATION GUIDE  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Preparation before Use  
How to Load Originals  
IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.  
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.  
1
Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.  
2
Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or  
the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide  
the leading edge into the document processor as  
far as it will go.  
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides  
exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the  
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals  
to jam.  
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the  
level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may  
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).  
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines  
should be placed in such a way that the holes or  
perforations will be scanned last (not first).  
2-46  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Basic Operation  
This chapter explains the following operations.  
• Power On/Off ................................................................3-2  
• Auto Low Power Mode..................................................3-4  
• Sleep and Auto Sleep ...................................................3-5  
• Login/Logout .................................................................3-6  
• One-Touch Keys and Program Keys.............................3-7  
• Message Display...........................................................3-8  
• Copying.........................................................................3-9  
• Printing - Printing from Applications............................3-18  
• Sending.......................................................................3-20  
• Confirm Destination Screen .......................................3-27  
• Specifying Destination ................................................3-28  
• Canceling Jobs ...........................................................3-31  
• Checking Remaining Toner and Paper .......................3-32  
• Program (Copying and Sending) ................................3-33  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation  
Power On/Off  
Power On  
When the main power indicator is lit...  
Press the Power key.  
When the main power indicator is off...  
Turn the main  
power switch on.  
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.  
Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.  
3-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BasicOperation  
Power Off  
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the  
Power and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.  
Memory  
3
Make sure that  
the indicators  
are off.  
In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time  
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the  
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),  
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the FS-1128MFP, note that turning  
the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.  
CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
Auto Low Power Mode  
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for 2 minutes.  
3-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BasicOperation  
Sleep and Auto Sleep  
Sleep  
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Message Display  
and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to  
save a maximum amount of power except the Main  
Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.  
3
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is  
performed while the Message Display remains unlit.  
If you are using the FS-1128MFP, received fax data is printed  
out while the operation panel also remains unlit.  
To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be  
ready to operate in about 15 seconds.  
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as  
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more  
slowly.  
Auto Sleep  
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode if left idle for 15 minutes.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operation  
Login/Logout  
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the  
machine.  
NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in  
with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.  
Login  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
If the screen shown appears during operations,  
enter the login user name.  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
3
Press the V key. The input cursor moves to Login  
Password.  
Enter the login password.  
Press the U key to move the input cursor to Login  
User Name.  
4
Check the login user name and password are  
correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
Logout  
To logout from the machine, press the Logout to return  
to the login user name/password entry screen.  
3-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BasicOperation  
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys  
The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below.  
One-Touch Key  
Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable  
one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch  
Key on page 8-124.  
3
Entering Destination with One-touch Key  
1
In Address Entry, press the one-touch key where  
the desired destination is registered.  
Address Entry:  
B b  
*
Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Press the one-touch key where the destination is  
registered.  
Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22  
Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the lamp next  
to the keys, and then press the one-touch key  
where the destination is registered.  
2
The destination registered to the one-touch key is  
recalled and automatically entered on the screen.  
Address Entry  
A b  
5y@kyoceramita.co.jp  
*
IMPORTANT: Any destination already entered is  
overwritten.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Program Keys  
Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a  
program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just  
pressing the applicable program key. For registering settings to a program key, refer to Program (Copying and  
Sending) on page 3-33.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation  
Message Display  
The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display.  
1
2
3
4
5
Ready to copy.  
Copies: 1  
sA A4  
1
Ready to send.  
Dest.: 1  
:sally@kyoceramita  
1-sided  
6
7
8
9
A4  
100%  
[ Zoom ] [  
q
a
p
N
4
5
]
[ Duplex ] [  
]
Copier Screen  
Send Screen  
Reference  
number  
Meaning  
1
Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current  
menu whenever the operation panel is being used.  
2
Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. The  
meaning of each icon is as indicated below.  
A
The standard paper cassette is currently selected. When this icon is  
displayed as G , there is no paper is the cassette.  
B
C
The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected.  
When this icon is displayed as H or I , there is no paper is the cassette.  
F
The MP Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as L, there  
is no paper is the MP Tray.  
3
4
Displays the size of the original(s).  
Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be  
selected using the left or right Select keys.  
5
Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the left  
or right Select keys.  
6
7
8
9
Displays the number of copies.  
Displays the paper size to be copied.  
Displays the number of destinations.  
Displays the destination.  
3-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BasicOperation  
Copying  
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.  
1
Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator  
is off.  
3
NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the  
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.  
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the optional  
document processor.  
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading  
Originals on page 2-44.  
3
The paper source for copying is the location  
displayed on the panel.  
Ready to copy.  
Copies: 1  
Letterq sA Letter  
a
100%  
[ Zoom ] [ Paper ]  
Paper source  
When you need to change the paper source, use  
the Paper Selection menu. If [Auto] is selected, the  
most suitable paper source is automatically  
selected.  
Paper Selection: a b  
1
*********************  
* Auto  
2 A A4  
3 B A5  
a
a
Plain  
Plain  
For specifying the paper source, refer to Paper  
Selection on page 4-4.  
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.  
Specify the desired number up to 999.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation  
5
6
Press the Start key to start copying.  
Remove the finished copies from the top tray.  
Adjusting Density  
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.  
Density Adjustment Option  
Description  
Manual  
Auto  
Adjust density using 7 levels.  
Optimum density is selected according  
to the density of the original.  
NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-37).  
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
Paper Selection  
g
*********************  
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Density].  
Press the OK key. Density appears.  
Density:  
Auto  
*Manual  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
4
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].  
3-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BasicOperation  
5
6
Press the OK key.  
Manual:  
a b  
*********************  
When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears. Press  
the U or V key to select your desired density and  
then press the OK key.  
1
u
Lighter -3  
2
3
v
w
Lighter -2  
Lighter -1  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen.  
3
Press the Start key. Copying begins.  
Selecting Image Quality  
Select image quality suited to the type of original.  
The table below shows the quality options.  
Image Quality Option  
Description  
Text+Photo  
For originals with both text and  
photographs.  
Photo  
Text  
For photos taken with a camera.  
For originals primarily consisting of text.  
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].  
Press the OK key. Original Image appears.  
Original Image:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Text+Photo  
2
3
Photo  
Text  
4
5
6
Press the U or V key to select the image quality  
suited to the type of original.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
Press the Start key. Copying begins.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
Zoom Copying  
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.  
Auto Zoom  
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image  
suitably to the selected paper size.  
Ledger: 129 %  
Letter-R  
A3: 141 %  
Statement-R: 64 %  
A4  
A5: 70 %  
Zoom Entry  
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%  
increments between 25% and 400%.  
25 %  
400 %  
Standard Zoom  
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.  
The following magnifications are available.  
Model  
Inch  
Zoom Level (OriginalCopy)  
Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 129% (Statement >> Letter),  
78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement), 50%,  
25% (Min.)  
Models  
Other  
141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4),  
86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5)  
Metric  
Models  
Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),  
115% (B5 >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5),  
50%, 25% (Min.)  
Other  
129% (Statement >> Letter), 90% (Folio >> A4),  
78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement)  
3-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
BasicOperation  
Model  
Zoom Level (OriginalCopy)  
Metric  
Models  
(Asia  
Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),  
115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5),  
70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)  
Pacific)  
Other  
129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter),  
64% (Letter >> Statement)  
3
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].  
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.  
Zoom:  
*100%  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Auto  
Standard Zoom  
4
Press the U or V key to select the desired  
magnification.  
To copy in the same size as the original, select  
[100%].  
To select automatic zoom, select [Auto].  
To use fixed magnifications, select [Standard  
Zoom] and press the OK key. Standard Zoom  
appears. Press the U or V key to select the  
desired magnification. If you select [Other] and  
press the OK key, you can select from additional  
magnifications.  
Standard Zoom:  
a b  
*********************  
1
400%  
2
3
200%  
141% A5 >> A4  
To enter a magnification, select [Zoom Entry] and  
press the OK key. Zoom Entry appears. Use the  
numeric keys to enter the any magnification.  
Zoom Entry:  
(25 - 400)  
*****200  
D b  
%
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
5
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
Press the Start key. Copying begins.  
Duplex Copying  
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.  
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.  
The following modes are available.  
One-sided to Two-sided  
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In  
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the  
last copy will be blank.  
5
4
5
3
3
2
1
1
Original  
A
Copy  
B
The following binding options are available.  
ghi  
ghi  
ghi  
def  
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on  
abc  
abc  
def  
abc  
the second sides are not rotated.  
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the  
second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound  
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when  
turning the pages.  
Original  
Copy  
Two-sided to One-sided  
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two  
individual sheets. The optional document processor is  
required.  
1
1
2
Original  
Copy  
The following binding options are available.  
•
•
Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides  
are not rotated.  
Binding Top: Images on the second sides are  
rotated 180°.  
3-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BasicOperation  
Two-sided to Two-sided  
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
The optional document processor is required.  
5
5
3
3
1
1
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to  
Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, A4,  
B5, A5 and Folio.  
Original  
Copy  
3
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].  
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.  
Duplex:  
a b  
1
*********************  
*1-sided>>1-sided  
2
3
1-sided>>2-sided  
2-sided>>1-sied  
4
Press the U or V key to select the desired duplex  
copying mode.  
NOTE: [2-sided>>1-sided] and [2-sided>>2-sided] are  
shown only when the optional document processor  
(DP-110) is installed.  
If you select [1-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the  
Right Select key) and you can select the binding  
edge of the finished copies and the original setting  
orientation.  
Finish. Binding: a b  
Left/Right  
1
*********************  
*o  
2
p
Top  
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge  
of the finished copies and the original setting  
orientation.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
Top Edge Top  
1
*********************  
*c  
2
d
Top Edge left  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the  
Right Select key) and you can select the binding  
edge of the original and the original setting  
orientation.  
Orig. Binding:  
Left/Right  
a b  
*********************  
1
*o  
2
p
Top  
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge  
of the original and finished copies, and the original  
setting orientation.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
Top Edge Top  
1
*********************  
*c  
2
d
Top Edge left  
If you select [2-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the  
Right Select key) and you can select the binding  
edge of the original and the original setting  
orientation.  
Orig. Binding:  
Left/Right  
a b  
*********************  
1
*o  
2
p
Top  
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge  
of the finished copies and the original setting  
orientation.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
Top Edge Top  
1
*********************  
*c  
2
d
Top Edge left  
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge  
of the original and finished copies, and the original  
setting orientation.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
Top Edge Top  
1
*********************  
*c  
2
d
Top Edge left  
5
6
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
Press the Start key. Copying begins.  
Scanning...  
Job No.: 9999  
If the original is placed on the platen, replace it with  
the next one before pressing the Start key.  
Page(s):  
1
[ Cancel ]  
3-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BasicOperation  
If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the  
Right Select key). Copying begins.  
Set original  
and press Start key.  
Job No.: 9999  
Page(s):  
3
[ Cancel ] [End Scan]  
3
Collate Copying  
The machine can collate at the same time as it copies.  
You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below.  
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of  
3
2
copies as required according to page number.  
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
3
2
1
Original  
Copy  
The procedure for using collate copying is explained  
below.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Collate].  
Press the OK key. Collate appears.  
Collate:  
Off  
*On  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
6
Press the Start key Copying begins.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
Printing - Printing from Applications  
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.  
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied  
CD-ROM (Product Library).  
1
2
Create a document using an application.  
Click File and select Print in the application. The  
Print dialog box appears.  
3
Click the T button next to the Name field and select  
this machine from the list.  
4
5
Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of  
copies box. Enter any number up to 999.  
When there is more than one document, select  
Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of  
the page numbers.  
Click Properties button. The Properties dialog  
box appears.  
3-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BasicOperation  
6
Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to  
select the paper size.  
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or  
transparency, click the Media Type menu and  
select the media type.  
3
7
Click Source and select the paper source.  
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are  
supplied automatically from the paper source loaded  
with paper of optimum size and type. To print on  
special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it  
on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray.  
8
Select paper orientation, either Portrait or  
Landscape, to match the orientation of the  
document.  
Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document  
rotated 180°.  
9
Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.  
10 Click OK button to start printing.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Sending  
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the  
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the  
network.  
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended  
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.  
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.  
To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:  
•
•
Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.  
Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the  
SMTP server, and the recipient.  
•
•
Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys.  
When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up  
the PC Folder, contact your administrator.  
•
Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image  
at the same time)  
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.  
•
•
•
•
Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-21  
Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-23  
Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-23  
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer  
to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide  
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of  
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-30.  
3-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BasicOperation  
Send as E-mail  
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.  
NOTE:  
•
You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is  
recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any  
time over a LAN.  
3
•
•
Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For  
details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-25.  
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
3
4
Press the Send key.  
Displays the screen for sending.  
Press the U or V key to select [E-mail].  
Press the OK key. Address Entry appears.  
Enter the destination e-mail address.  
Send to:  
1 p E-mail  
2 G Folder(SMB)  
3 H Folder(FTP)  
a b  
*********************  
Address Entry:  
*
B b  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the  
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to  
Specifying Destination on page 3-28.  
5
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
Ready to send.  
Dest.: 1  
p
:sally@kyoceramitaN  
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new  
destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], a screen to  
confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Enter the  
same e-mail address again and press the OK key.  
1-sided 300x300dpi  
[ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation  
6
7
If there are additional destinations, press the Add  
Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter  
additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can  
be specified.  
Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the  
registered destinations.  
Press the U or V key to select a destination and  
press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the  
destination.  
Dest. Confirm.:  
p Morgan@kyoceramita  
*********************  
a b  
N
p
p
aaaaaaaaa@kyoceram  
bbbbbbbbb@kyoceram  
N
N
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the  
basic screen.  
[ Exit ]  
8
Press the Start key. Transmission starts.  
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination  
before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], the  
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start  
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm  
Destination Screen on page 3-27.  
3-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BasicOperation  
Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)  
Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.  
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.  
NOTE:  
3
•
•
Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.  
Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA  
COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
Press the Send key.  
Displays the screen for sending.  
2
Press the U or V key to select [Folder(SMB)] or  
[Folder(FTP)].  
Send to:  
a b  
1 p E-mail  
2 G Folder(SMB)  
*********************  
3 H Folder(FTP)  
3
4
Press the OK key. Host Name(SMB) or Host  
Name(FTP) appears.  
Host Name(SMB):  
Osaka SD  
A b  
*
Enter the host name.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the  
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to  
Specifying Destination on page 3-28.  
or  
Host Name(FTP):  
Osaka SD  
A b  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
5
Press the OK key. Path appears.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
6
Enter the path name. Consider, that the share name  
but not the foldername on the destination pc has  
Path:  
A b  
SD3\report  
*
to be typed in.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
7
8
Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.  
Enter the login user name. You have to enter the  
account name of the destination pc.  
Login User Name: C b  
Maury  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
9
Press the OK key. Login Password appears.  
Login Password:  
OOOOOOOOOOO  
A b  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
10 Enter the login password (account on the destination pc.)  
11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Check the connection.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new  
destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], screens to  
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.  
Enter the same host name and path name again and  
press the OK key on their respective screens.  
Data to be entered are as follows.  
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your  
administrator and check your login user name or login password.  
3-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BasicOperation  
For send to folder (SMB)  
Max.  
characters  
Item  
Data to be entered  
Host Name  
(SMB)*  
Host name or IP address of the PC to  
receive the data.  
Up to 64  
characters  
3
Path  
Path to the receiving folder such as  
follows.  
Up to 128  
characters  
For example, User\Sharename.  
Login User  
Name  
User name to access the PC  
For example, abcdnet\james.smith  
Up to 64  
characters  
Login  
Password to access the PC  
Up to 64  
Password  
characters  
*
To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using  
the format “host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname: 140).  
For send to folder (FTP)  
Max.  
characters  
Item  
Host Name  
Data to be entered  
Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64  
characters  
(FTP)*  
Path  
Path to the receiving folder.  
For example, User\ScanData.  
Otherwise the data will be saved in the  
home directory.  
Up to 128  
characters  
Login User  
Name  
FTP server log-in user name  
Up to 64  
characters  
Login  
FTP server log-in password  
Up to 64  
Password  
characters  
*
To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using  
the format “host name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname: 140).  
12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a  
Dest. Confirm.:  
a b  
connection with the entered destination.  
p
b
Morgan@kyoceramita  
0667640000  
N
*********************  
b
0667741234  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation  
If the connection is successful, Connected. is  
displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right  
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the basic screen.  
If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is  
displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The  
screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check and re-  
enter the destination.  
13 If there are additional destinations, press the Add  
Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter  
additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can  
be specified.  
14 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the  
Dest. Confirm.:  
a b  
*********************  
registered destinations.  
H
OSAKA SD  
Press the U or V key to select a destination and  
press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the  
destination.  
G
G
EI5  
PT10  
[ Exit ]  
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the  
basic screen.  
15 Press the Start key. Transmission starts.  
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination  
before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], the  
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start  
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm  
Destination Screen on page 3-27.  
3-26  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BasicOperation  
Confirm Destination Screen  
If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-64) is set to [On], Check through the all  
destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed.  
Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen.  
1
2
3
Press the U or V key to check all destinations.  
3
Destination List: a b  
Morgan@kyoceramita  
Press the OK key to edit or delete the selected  
destination.  
p
*********************  
N
b
b
0667640000  
0667741234  
To add a destination, press [Cancel] (the Left  
Select key) to return to the previous screen.  
[ Cancel ] [ Next ]  
p
1
2
Morgan@kyoceramNa b  
Detail  
Delete  
After the checking is finished, press [Next] (the  
Right Select key). Set original and press Start key.  
is displayed on the screen.  
Set original  
and press Start key.  
[ Cancel ]  
If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet  
checked, the screen displays Check the destination  
list through the end. and returns to the Destination  
List screen. Check all destinations.  
Check the destination  
list through the end.  
Place the original on the platen and press the Start  
key. Transmission starts.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
Specifying Destination  
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys.  
Choosing from the Address Book  
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.  
1
2
In the basic screen for sending, press the Address  
Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appears.  
Select Addr Book: a b  
Address Book  
t
*********************  
t
Ext Address Book  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and  
then press the OK key. Address Book appears.  
Address Book:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
To use an address book on the LDAP server, select  
[Ext Address Book].  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
NOTE: If external address book is not registered, [Ext  
Address Book] is not displayed.  
3
Press the U or V key to select the desired user or  
group, and then press the OK key.  
If you select a user, the list of destinations  
registered to the user appears.  
l
b
Fiala:  
0667643277  
fiala@kyoceramita.  
SMB-PC  
a b  
*********************  
If you select a group, proceed to step 5.  
p
N
H
[ Menu ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select the desired  
destination and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen.  
Destination Search  
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.  
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.  
3-28  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
BasicOperation  
Search in Address Book  
1
2
3
4
In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select  
key). Menu appears.  
Menu:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Select  
2
3
Detail  
Search(Name)  
3
Press the U or V key to select [Search(Name)]  
and then press the OK key. A search screen  
appears.  
Address Book:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
Enter the characters you want to search.  
Search(Name):  
ma  
A b  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Press the OK key. The address book appears with  
the user that starts with the entered character string  
at the top.  
Address Book:  
a b  
*********************  
l
Maury  
l
l
Morgan  
Sally  
[ Menu ]  
Search in External Address Book  
1
2
In Ext Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right  
Select key). Menu appears.  
Ext Address Book: a b  
l
*********************  
Fiala  
l
l
Maury  
Morgan  
[ Menu ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Search] and then  
press the OK key. A search screen appears.  
Menu:  
a b  
1
2
Select  
Detail  
Search  
3
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
3
4
Enter the characters you want to search.  
Search(Name):  
ma  
A b  
If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and then  
the OK key, Search by appears where you can  
specify the search key and match condition. Select  
the desired item for each and then press the OK  
key.  
*
S
ABC  
[ Menu ] [ Text ]  
Press the OK key. The address book appears with  
the user that starts with the entered character string  
at the top.  
Ext Address Book: a b  
l
*********************  
Maury  
l
l
Morgan  
Sally  
[ Menu ]  
NOTE: If you first open the extended address book, the search screen appears first. Then, operate from step 3.  
Choosing by One-Touch Key  
Select the destination using the One-touch keys.  
In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry  
screen, press the one-touch key where the destination  
is registered.  
NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch  
Key on page 8-124 for more information on adding  
one-touch keys.  
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)  
You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers.  
This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses,  
folders, etc.) in a single operation.  
No. of broadcast items E-mail  
Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 1 SMB and FTP  
FAX : Up to 100  
: Up to 100  
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.  
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail  
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to  
all destinations at one time.  
3-30  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BasicOperation  
Canceling Jobs  
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.  
Canceling Jobs  
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.  
3
1
During a printing or sending job, press the Stop  
key. The Job Cancel List menu appears.  
Job Cancel List: a b  
Print Job List  
1
*********************  
2
3
Send Job List  
Store Job List  
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job  
but does not pause a sending job.  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
4
5
Press the U or V key to select the type of job you  
want to stop, and then press the OK key. An output  
queue of the selected job type is displayed.  
Print Job List:  
0008 Copy  
a b  
r
**********************  
s
0009  
0010  
W
W
maury's data  
MicrosoftworNs  
s
[ Resume ] [ Menu ]  
Press the U or V key to select the job you want to  
stop, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select  
key). Menu appears.  
Menu:  
Detail  
a b  
1
*********************  
Cancel Job  
2
Press the U or V key to select [Cancel Job] and  
then press the OK key. A confirmation screen  
appears.  
Job will be canceled.  
Are you sure?  
z
0008  
r
Copy  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). The screen  
displays Canceling.... and returns to the output  
queue of the selected job type after the job is  
canceled.  
To cancel other jobs, repeat steps 3 to 5.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation  
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper  
You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette.  
Checking Remaining Toner  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Toner Status].  
Press the OK key. Toner Status appears.  
Toner Status:  
b
The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one  
of 10 levels.  
0% VVVVEEEEEE 100%  
Checking Remaining Paper  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Status].  
Press the OK key. Paper Status appears.  
Paper Status:  
Cassette 1:  
C b  
1/ 4  
Empty  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display of  
remaining paper amount among the main unit  
cassette, optional cassette (if installed) and MP  
tray.  
Letter  
a
Plain  
3-32  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BasicOperation  
Program (Copying and Sending)  
Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a  
program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just  
pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys.  
Registering Settings  
3
After making settings, press and hold the one of the  
Registered.  
Program 1  
Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the  
settings for 3 seconds. The current settings are  
registered to the selected program key.  
z
Changing and Deleting Settings  
1
2
Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys  
where the settings you want to change/delete are  
registered for 3 seconds. Menu appears.  
Menu:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Overwrite  
2
Delete  
To replace the registered settings with the current  
settings, press the U or V key to select [Overwrite]  
and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen  
appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to  
change the settings.  
Overwrite.  
Are you sure?  
z
Program 1  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
To delete the registered settings, press the U or V  
key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key. A  
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left  
Select key) to delete the registered settings.  
Delete.  
Are you sure?  
z
Program 1  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Recalling Settings  
Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current  
settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation  
3-34  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Copying Functions  
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.  
• Original Size.........................................................................................4-2  
• Paper Selection....................................................................................4-4  
• Original Orientation..............................................................................4-8  
• EcoPrint .............................................................................................4-10  
• Combine Mode................................................................................... 4-11  
• Continuous Scan................................................................................4-15  
• Job Finish Notice ...............................................................................4-16  
• File Name Entry .................................................................................4-18  
• Print Override.....................................................................................4-19  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying Functions  
Original Size  
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying  
process.  
The following options are available.  
Item  
How to Select  
Sizes  
Standard  
Sizes  
Select from  
standard sizes.  
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,  
Officio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,  
16K  
Others  
Select from  
envelope,  
postcard or the  
custom sized  
originals*.  
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,  
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,  
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2  
and Custom  
*
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size,  
refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.  
Use the procedure below to select the original size.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
Paper Selection  
g
*********************  
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Original Size].  
Press the OK key. Original Size appears.  
Original Size:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Letter  
q
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
q
q
6
Press the U or V key to select the desired original  
size and then press the OK key.  
4-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CopyingFunctions  
If you select [Others], select one of the other  
options and then press the OK key.  
Others:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*ISO B5  
q
2
3
Envelope #10  
Envelope #9  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
4
7
Press the Start key to start copying.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Functions  
Paper Selection  
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.  
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper  
Settings on page 8-8).  
Selecting the Cassette  
Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].  
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.  
Paper Selection: a b  
* Auto  
1
*********************  
2 A Letter  
a
Plain  
Plain  
3 B Custom  
a
6
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
size.  
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of  
the original is selected automatically.  
7
8
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
Press the Start key to start copying.  
4-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CopyingFunctions  
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray  
Change the paper size and media type.  
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.  
How to  
Select  
Category  
Item  
Sizes  
Paper  
Size  
Standard Select from  
Letter, Legal, Statement,  
Sizes  
the standard Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5,  
4
size.  
A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K *  
Others  
Select from  
envelope,  
postcard or  
the custom  
sized  
ISO B5, Envelope #10,  
Envelope #9, Envelope #6,  
Envelope Monarch, Envelope  
DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,  
Youkei 2 and Custom  
originals  
Size  
Entry  
Enter the  
size not  
included in  
Inch models  
Horizontal: 5.83 to 14.02" (in  
0.01" increments), Vertical: 2.76  
the standard to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
sizes 1 and  
Metric models  
2**.  
Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm  
increments), Horizontal: 148 to  
356 mm (in 1 mm increments)  
Media  
Type  
Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,  
Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***,  
Letterhead***, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to  
8***  
*
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom),  
refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on  
page 8-11.  
**  
The input units can be changed in the System menu.  
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-27.  
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8,  
refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17.  
***  
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to  
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.  
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them  
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-15).  
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.  
1
2
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying Functions  
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].  
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.  
Paper Selection: a b  
* Auto  
1
*********************  
2 A A4  
3 B A5  
a
a
Plain  
Plain  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].  
Press the OK key. MP Tray Set. appears.  
MP Tray Set.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Standard Size  
2
3
Others  
Size Entry  
8
Press the U or V key to select [Standard Size],  
[Others] or [Size Entry] and press the OK key,  
select the desired paper size, and then press the  
OK key.  
If you select [Size Entry], using the numeric keys to  
enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key,  
and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the  
OK key.  
Size Entry(Y):  
(5.83 - 14.02)  
11.49 "  
D b  
x
******  
9
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper  
type and then press the OK key.  
Media Type:  
*Plain  
a b  
*********************  
1
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
2
3
Transparency  
Rough  
10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray.  
11 Press the Start key to start copying.  
4-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CopyingFunctions  
If Add paper in MP tray. is displayed during the  
copying process, add paper in the multi purpose  
tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then  
resumes.  
4
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Functions  
Original Orientation  
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.  
•
•
Duplex  
Combine mode  
When placing originals on the platen  
[Top Edge Top]  
[Top Edge Left]  
When placing originals on the optional document processor  
[Top Edge Left]  
[Top Edge Top]  
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30.  
4-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CopyingFunctions  
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
4
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].  
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
1 c Top Edge Top  
2 Top Edge Left  
*********************  
*d  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or  
[Top Edge Left].  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
8
Press the Start key to start copying.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Functions  
EcoPrint  
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high  
quality print is unnecessary.  
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].  
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.  
EcoPrint:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
Press the Start key to start copying.  
4-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CopyingFunctions  
Combine Mode  
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The  
page boundary of each original can be indicated.  
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement  
and 16K.  
2-in-1 Mode  
4
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals  
onto one sheet.  
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.  
Original  
Copy  
Orientation of Original  
Platen Document processor  
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying Functions  
4-in-1 Mode  
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals  
onto one sheet.  
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.  
Original  
Copy  
Orientation of Original  
Platen Document processor  
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.  
4-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CopyingFunctions  
Types of Page Boundary Lines  
The following types of the boundary lines are available.  
4
None  
Solid  
Dotted  
Positioning  
Mark  
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Combine].  
Press the OK key. Combine appears.  
Combine:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
2 in 1  
4 in 1  
[ Detail ]  
6
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1].  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key).  
Press the U or V key to select the desired layout  
and then press the OK key.  
2 in 1 Layout:  
a b  
1
*********************  
*g  
L to R  
f
T to B  
2 e R to L  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying Functions  
9
Press the U or V key to select the desired border  
line type and then press the OK key.  
Border Line:  
a b  
*********************  
1
* None  
2 l Solid Line  
3 m Dotted Line  
10 Press the U or V key to select the orientation of  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
the original and then press the OK key.  
1 c Top Edge Top  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
2
*********************  
*d  
Top Edge Left  
11 Press the Start key. Scanning begins.  
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the  
original and press the Start key.  
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the  
Right Select key) to start copying.  
4-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CopyingFunctions  
Continuous Scan  
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be  
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you  
press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).  
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.  
1
2
Press the Copy key.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
1 Paper Selection  
*********************  
a b  
g
4
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].  
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.  
Continuous Scan: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
5
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
6
7
Place the originals in the document processor or on  
the platen and press the Start key.  
Place the next original and press the Start key.  
Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.  
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the  
Right Select key) to start copying.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying Functions  
Job Finish Notice  
Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while  
working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.  
NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.  
Example of Job Finish Notice  
To:  
h_pttr@owl-net.net  
Subject:  
1234 Job end report mail  
Job No.:  
000002  
Result:  
OK  
End Time:  
File Name:  
Job Type:  
Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08  
doc27042005145608  
Copy  
------------------------------------------------  
1234  
[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14]  
------------------------------------------------  
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice].  
4-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CopyingFunctions  
5
Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.  
JobFinish Notice: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
4
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or  
[Address Entry], and then press the OK key.  
Destination:  
*Address Book  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Address Entry  
8
If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book]  
on the next screen and press the OK key, and then  
select the notice destination.  
Address Book:  
a b  
*********************  
p
Fiala  
p
p
Maury  
Morgan  
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail]  
on the next screen and press the OK key to view  
the details of the selected notice destination.  
[ Menu ]  
If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of  
the notice destination.  
Address Entry:  
B b  
******@abcdefg.jp  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
9
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
10 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon  
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the  
selected destination.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Functions  
File Name Entry  
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a  
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.  
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.  
1
2
3
Press the Copy key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].  
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.  
File Name Entry: A b  
File_2009  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
6
Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional  
Info. appears.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
7
Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and  
then press the OK key.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for copying.  
8
Press the Start key to start copying.  
4-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CopyingFunctions  
Print Override  
This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the  
interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job.  
NOTE: If the machine is left for 60 seconds in the interruption copy mode, the interrupt copy job is  
automatically canceled and the print job resumed.  
1
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
4
1
*********************  
Paper Selection  
g
2
3
Collate  
Duplex  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Print Override].  
Press the OK key. Print Override appears.  
Print Override:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed, the  
machine is put into the interruption copy mode, and  
the basic screen appears.  
6
Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion  
as a normal copy job. When the interrupt copy job  
is completed, the machine resumes the suspended  
print job.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying Functions  
4-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Sending Functions  
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.  
• Original Size..................................................................5-2  
• Sending Size.................................................................5-4  
• Zoom.............................................................................5-6  
• Duplex Sending.............................................................5-7  
• Original Orientation.......................................................5-8  
• File Format..................................................................5-10  
• Original Image.............................................................5-12  
• Adjusting Density ........................................................5-13  
• Scan Resolution..........................................................5-14  
• Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection ...........5-15  
• Continuous Scan.........................................................5-16  
• File Name Entry ..........................................................5-17  
• Subject and Body Entry ..............................................5-18  
• WSD Scan ..................................................................5-19  
• Job Finish Notice ........................................................5-21  
• FTP Encrypted TX ......................................................5-23  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Functions  
Original Size  
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before  
starting the sending process.  
Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.  
Item  
Detail  
Size  
Standard  
Sizes  
Select from  
standard sizes.  
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,  
Officio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,  
16K  
Others  
Select from  
Hagaki and  
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,  
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,  
Custom Original Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
Size *.  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2  
and Custom  
*
Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size, refer to  
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.  
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Original Size].  
Press the OK key. Original Size appears.  
Original Size:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Letter  
q
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
q
q
6
Press the U or V key to select the desired original  
size and then press the OK key.  
5-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SendingFunctions  
If you select [Others], select one of the other  
options and then press the OK key.  
Others:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*ISO B5  
q
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
2
3
Envelope #10  
Envelope #9  
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Functions  
Sending Size  
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).  
The table below lists the sizes.  
Item  
Detail  
Size  
Standard Select from Same  
Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter,  
Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4,  
A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K  
Sizes  
as Original Size or  
Standard Size.  
Others  
Select from  
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,  
envelope, postcard Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,  
or the custom sized Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
originals*.  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4 and Youkei  
2
*
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to  
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.  
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom  
Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following  
table.  
Original Size and the size you  
the same  
different  
wish to send as are  
Original Size  
Specify as  
necessary  
Specify as  
necessary  
Sending Size  
Zoom  
Select [Same as Select the  
OrigSize]  
required size  
Select [100%]  
(or [Auto])  
Select [Auto]  
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you  
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).  
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
5-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SendingFunctions  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Sending Size].  
Press the OK key. Sending Size appears.  
Sending Size:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Same as OrigSize  
2
3
Letter  
Legal  
6
Press the U or V key to select the desired sending  
size.  
If you select [Others], select one of the other  
options.  
Others:  
a b  
*********************  
5
1
*ISO B5  
2
3
Envelope #10  
Envelope #9  
7
8
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Functions  
Zoom  
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.  
The table below lists the available options.  
Item  
Detail  
100%  
Auto  
No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)  
Zoomed automatically according to the specified  
sending size.  
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size.  
When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and  
zooming cannot be used.  
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.  
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.  
1
2
3
4
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Select the transmission size.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].  
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.  
Zoom:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*100%  
2
Auto  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto]  
and then press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SendingFunctions  
Duplex Sending  
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.  
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.  
Original  
Type  
Binding  
Binding  
1-sided Sheet Original  
2-sided Sheet Original  
1-sided  
2-sided*  
—
—
Binding Left/Right,  
Binding Top  
Top Edge Top,  
Top Edge Left  
*
Only when the optional document processor is installed for  
FS-1028MFP.  
5
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].  
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.  
Duplex:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*1-sided  
2
2-sided  
[ Detail ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select [1-sided] or [2-  
sided].  
If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right  
Select key), select the binding edge and press the  
OK key, and then select the original setting  
orientation on the next screen.  
7
8
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Functions  
Original Orientation  
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To  
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.  
•
1-sided / 2-sided Selection  
When placing the original on the platen  
[Top Edge Top]  
[Top Edge Left]  
When placing the original on the optional document processor  
[Top Edge Left]  
[Top Edge Top]  
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].  
5-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SendingFunctions  
5
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
1 c Top Edge Top  
2 Top Edge Left  
*********************  
*d  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or  
[Top Edge Left].  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
5
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Functions  
File Format  
Select the file format of the image to send.  
The table below lists the file formats and their details.  
Adjustable range of image  
File Format  
quality  
Color mode  
PDF  
TIFF  
XPS  
JPEG  
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale, Black  
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) and White  
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale, Black  
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) and White  
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale  
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)  
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Full Color, Grayscale  
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)  
NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode.  
Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
Color Selection  
g
*********************  
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [File Format].  
Press the OK key. File Format appears.  
File Format:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*PDF  
2
3
TIFF  
XPS  
[ Detail ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select the file format from  
[PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG].  
If Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for the  
color mode for scanning, press [Detail] (the Right  
Select key) and select the image quality.  
5-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SendingFunctions  
7
8
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Functions  
Original Image  
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.  
The table below shows the quality options.  
Item  
Detail  
Text+Photo  
Photo  
Text and photos together.  
For photos taken with a camera.  
Only text, no photos.  
Text  
Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].  
Press the OK key. Original Image appears.  
Original Image:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Text+Photo  
2
3
Photo  
Text  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select the desired image  
quality.  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SendingFunctions  
Adjusting Density  
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.  
The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Detail  
Manual  
Auto  
Adjust density using 7 levels.  
Optimum density is selected according to the  
density of the original.  
The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.  
5
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Density].  
Press the OK key. Density appears.  
Density:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Auto  
2
Manual  
6
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].  
If you select [Manual], press the OK key, and then  
select the density on the next screen.  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Functions  
Scan Resolution  
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),  
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and  
longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,  
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.  
The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution].  
Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.  
Scan Resolution: a b  
200x400dpi S.Fin  
*300x300dpi  
3
4
*********************  
400x400dpi U.Fin  
5
6
7
Press the U or V key to select the desired scan  
resolution.  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SendingFunctions  
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection  
This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can  
select from Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.  
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
5
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].  
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.  
Color Selection: a b  
*Full Color  
1
*********************  
2
3
Grayscale  
Black & White  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select the desired color  
mode.  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Functions  
Continuous Scan  
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be  
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after  
another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).  
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.  
1
2
Press the Send key.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].  
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.  
Continuous Scan: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
5
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
6
7
8
Specify the destination.  
Place the original, and press the Start key.  
Place the next original, and press the Start key.  
Scan the remaining originals by the same  
procedure.  
When you have scanned all the originals, press  
[End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending.  
5-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SendingFunctions  
File Name Entry  
This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the  
document name.  
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
Color Selection  
g
*********************  
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
5
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].  
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.  
File Name Entry: A b  
File_2009  
*
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
6
Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional  
Info. appears.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
7
Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and  
then press the OK key.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Functions  
Subject and Body Entry  
When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.  
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
Press the Send key.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body].  
Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears.  
Subject Entry:  
B b  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
5
Enter the subject and press the OK key.  
NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the  
subject.  
6
Enter the body and press the OK key.  
Body Entry:  
B b  
*
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the  
body.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
7
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
5-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SendingFunctions  
WSD Scan  
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.  
NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer.  
To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-132) must be set to [On] in the network settings.  
Procedure using computer  
1
Install the WIA driver on your computer in the  
custom mode from the supplied CD-ROM (Product  
Library).  
5
NOTE: For details of installation for WIA driver, refer to  
Setup Guide.  
2
3
Select Start button of the Windows display, and  
then Network.  
Select the machine displayed Multifunctional  
Devices, and then right-click Install.  
Installing of the driver starts.  
4
After installing the driver, click Close.  
Procedure using this machine  
1
2
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals in the document processor or on  
the platen.  
Displays the screen for sending.  
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book  
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to  
display the screen for sending.  
3
Press the U or V key to select [WSD Scan].  
Send to:  
a b  
2 G Folder(SMB)  
3 H Folder(FTP)  
4 F WSD Scan  
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Functions  
4
Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears.  
WSD Scan:  
From Computer  
a b  
1
2 From Oper. Panel  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [From Oper. Panel].  
Select the destination computer from the computer  
list.  
Select Computer: a b  
P
*********************  
Computer01  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the  
information of the selected computer.  
P
P
Computer02  
Computer03  
[Cancel ] [ Detail ]  
7
Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and  
then press the Start key. Transmission starts.  
Press Start Key.  
P
:Computer01  
NOTE: To change the destination computer, press the  
Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key).  
This brings you back to step 6.  
NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press  
[From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original  
from the computer.  
5-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SendingFunctions  
Job Finish Notice  
This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed.  
Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.  
1
2
3
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals on the platen.  
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
5
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice].  
Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.  
JobFinish Notice: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or  
[Address Entry], and then press the OK key.  
Destination:  
*Address Book  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Address Entry  
8
If you select [Address Book], select [Address Book]  
on the next screen and press the OK key, and then  
select the notice destination.  
Address Book:  
a b  
*********************  
p
Fiala  
p
p
Maury  
Morgan  
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select [Detail]  
on the next screen and press the OK key to view  
the details of the selected notice destination.  
[ Menu ]  
If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of  
the notice destination.  
Address Entry:  
A b  
******@abcdefg.jp  
*
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Functions  
9
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to  
start sending.  
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is  
sent to the specified E-mail address.  
5-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SendingFunctions  
FTP Encrypted TX  
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select  
the encryption method in the basic send screen.  
Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.  
1
2
Press the Send key.  
Place the originals in the document processor or on  
the platen.  
3
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu  
appears.  
Function Menu:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Color Selection  
g
5
2
3
Original Size  
Original Image  
T
T
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [FTP Encrypted  
TX].  
Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears.  
FTP Encrypted TX: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
6
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press  
the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the basic screen for sending.  
NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the  
COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure  
Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective  
encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For  
details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER  
Operation Guide.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Functions  
Sanning Image using Application  
Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable and installthe Kyocera TWAIN or WIA  
Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. For details of  
installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setup Guide.  
The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. Operate the WIA Drivers in  
the same manner.  
1
2
3
Connect your computer to the machine using a  
USB cable.  
Place the originals in the document processor or on  
the platen.  
Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan  
from your computer.  
NOTE: When the login user name and password entry  
screen appears, enter them and click the OK button.  
4
Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan.  
The scanned data will be sent to your computer.  
5-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6 Document Box  
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.  
• Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory.................6-2  
• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .....6-4  
• Removing USB Memory ...............................................6-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Document Box  
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory  
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the  
USB memory without having to use a computer.  
Limitations  
•
The following file types can be printed:  
•
•
•
PDF file (Version 1.5)  
TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)  
XPS file  
•
•
•
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).  
Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.  
Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory  
printing is error free if a USB hub is used.  
Printing  
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.  
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot.  
2
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box  
menu appears.  
Document Box:  
a b  
*********************  
1
USB Memory  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].  
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.  
USB Memory:  
a b  
*********************  
N
Store File  
i
j
Folder-1  
File-1  
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select the the file you want  
to print.  
6-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DocumentBox  
Select a folder and press the OK key to view the  
files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder  
levels including the root directory can be viewed.  
6
Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The selected  
file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it.  
USB Memory:  
a b  
N
Store File  
Folder-1  
i
j
*********************  
File-1  
g
[ Menu ] [ Select ]  
When you want to print additional files, repeat  
steps 5 to 6 to select them.  
7
Press the OK key. A menu appears.  
USB Memory:  
Print  
a b  
*********************  
1
6
2
Delete  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Print].  
Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.  
Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided  
printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print  
settings, refer to Copying on page 3-9 and  
Copying Functions on page 4-1.  
Ready to print.  
Copies: 1  
sA A4  
A4  
q
a
[
] [  
]
10 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file  
begins.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Box  
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)  
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store  
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.  
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.  
Storing Documents  
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.  
1
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot .  
2
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box  
menu appears.  
Document Box:  
a b  
*********************  
1
USB Memory  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].  
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.  
USB Memory:  
a b  
*********************  
N
Store File  
i
j
Folder-1  
File-1  
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Store File].  
Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.  
Change the original type, file format, etc., as  
necessary. For changing scan settings, refer to  
Sending Functions on page 5-1.  
Ready to scan.  
A4q  
[
] [  
]
7
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the  
data is stored in the USB memory.  
6-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DocumentBox  
IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory,  
ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as  
described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-6.  
6
OPERATION GUIDE  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Box  
Removing USB Memory  
Remove the USB memory.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.  
1
Press the Document Box key. The Document Box  
menu appears.  
Document Box:  
a b  
*********************  
1
USB Memory  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].  
Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.  
USB Memory:  
a b  
*********************  
N
Store File  
i
j
Folder-1  
File-1  
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]  
4
Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). A menu  
appears.  
Menu(Folder):  
a b  
1
2
Memory Detail  
Remove Memory  
NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder  
is selected. [Open] is not displayed when a file is  
selected.  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Remove Memory].  
Press the OK key. A confirmation message  
appears.  
USB memory can be  
safely removed.  
[ OK ]  
7
Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the  
USB memory. The screen returns to the Document  
Box menu.  
6-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7 Status / Job Cancel  
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being  
processed or waiting to be printed.  
This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the  
status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.  
• Checking Job Status .....................................................7-2  
• Checking Job History....................................................7-8  
• Sending the Job Log History.......................................7-13  
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs..................................7-19  
• Canceling of Jobs .......................................................7-19  
• Device/Communication...............................................7-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Status / Job Cancel  
Checking Job Status  
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.  
Available Status Screens  
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different  
screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job. The following job statuses are available.  
Screen  
Print Job  
Job statuses to be displayed  
Copy  
Printer  
FAX reception  
Document Box  
E-mail reception  
Job Report /List  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printing data from removable memory  
Send Job  
•
•
•
•
•
•
FAX transmission  
PC (SMB/FTP) transmission  
E-mail  
Application  
Multiple destination  
Sending Job FAX using Delayed  
transmission  
Store Job  
•
•
Scan  
FAX  
Scheduled Job  
•
FAX  
Print Job Status Screen  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status].  
Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. Press  
the U or V key to check the print queue.  
Print Job Status: a b  
0008  
0009  
0010  
r
r
W
Copy  
maury’s data  
aaaa  
r
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]  
1
2
3
4
7-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Status / Job Cancel  
Press the OK key to check detailed information of  
the selected job.  
0009 Detail:  
Status:  
C b  
1/8  
Processing  
NOTE: You can also check the job information by  
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting  
[Detail] in the menu that appears.  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Status (status of job)  
Accepted Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Page and Copy  
(number of pages and copies to be printed)  
Original Page (number of pages of the original)  
7
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the  
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.  
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.  
No.  
Item / Key  
Job No.  
Detail  
Acceptance No. of job  
1
2
Type  
Icons that indicate the job type  
„Copy job r  
„Printer job W  
„FAX reception b  
„E-mail reception p  
„Job from Document Box x  
„Report / List j  
„Data from Removable Memory Y  
Job Name or file name  
3
Job Name  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
No.  
Item / Key  
Status  
Detail  
4
Status of job  
r:  
Printing  
s:  
Print Waiting  
no icon:  
R:  
Pausing print job or error  
Preferential print job is  
running  
S:  
Suspended because  
preferential print job is  
running  
Send Job Status screen  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Status].  
Press the OK key. Send Job Status appears. Press  
the U or V key to check the send queue.  
Send Job Status: a b  
0010  
0011  
0017  
b
p
b
066764333  
Broadcast  
0324256345  
r
N
N
[Cancel ] [ Menu ]  
1
2
3
4
Press the OK key to check detailed information of  
the selected job.  
0011 Detail:  
Status:  
C b  
1/8  
Processing  
NOTE: You can also check the job information by  
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting  
[Detail] in the menu that appears.  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Status (status of job)  
Accepted Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)  
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)  
Destination  
7-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status / Job Cancel  
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to  
the original screen.  
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information  
When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete  
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.  
When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the  
destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the  
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.  
Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original  
screen.  
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.  
No.  
Item / Key  
Job No.  
Detail  
7
1
2
Acceptance No. of job  
Type  
Icons that indicate the job type  
„Sending Job FAX b  
„Sending Job PC (SMB) G  
„Sending Job PC (FTP) H  
„Sending Job E-mail p  
„Sending Job TWAIN2 U  
„Sending Job WSD Scan F  
When broadcast sending is done,  
Broadcast is diaplayed next to the  
icon.  
3
4
Destination  
Status  
Destination (Either destination name,  
FAX number, E-mail address, or  
server name)  
Status of job  
r:  
Sending  
no icon:  
s:  
X:  
Sending Waiting  
Pausing the job  
Stop sending  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Store Job Status screen  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Status].  
Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press  
the U or V key to check the store queue.  
Store Job Status: a b  
0008  
0009  
0010  
N
b
b
Scan  
maury’s data  
aaaa  
r
[Cancel ] [ Menu ]  
1
2
3
4
Press the OK key to check detailed information of  
the selected job.  
0009 Detail:  
Status:  
C b  
1/8  
Processing  
NOTE: You can also check the job information by  
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting  
[Detail] in the menu that appears.  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Status (status of job)  
Accepted Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)  
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)  
Sender Info. (destination information)  
7-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status / Job Cancel  
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to  
the original screen.  
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK  
key to return to the original screen.  
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.  
No.  
Display / Key  
Job No.  
Details  
1
2
Acceptance No. of job  
Icons that indicate the job type  
„Storing Job Scan N  
Type  
„Storing Job FAX b  
7
3
4
Job Name  
Status  
Job name or file name is displayed.  
Status of job  
s:  
Storing Data  
no icon:  
Storing Waiting  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Checking Job History  
Check the history of completed jobs.  
NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer.  
Available Job History Screens  
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job and Scheduled Job.  
The following job histories are available.  
Screen  
Job histories to be displayed  
Print Job  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copy  
Printer  
FAX reception  
E-mail reception  
Job Report / List  
Printing data from removable  
memory  
Send Job  
Store Job  
•
•
•
•
•
FAX  
PC (SMB/FTP)  
E-mail  
Application  
Multiple destination  
•
•
Scan  
FAX  
Scheduled Job  
•
FAX  
Displaying Print Job Log  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Log].  
Press the OK key. Print Job Log appears. Press the  
U or V key to check the print log.  
Print Job Log:  
a b  
0006  
0007  
0008  
r
r
r
maury’s da.  
tom’s da.  
susan’s da.  
v
u
u
[ Detail ]  
7-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Status / Job Cancel  
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right  
of each job.  
u : Job completed normally  
v : Job error  
t : Job aborted  
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job  
Status Screen on page 7-2.  
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)  
to check the detailed information of the selected  
print log.  
0006 Detail:  
Result:  
Error  
C b  
1/9  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
00100  
7
Result  
Accepted Time  
End Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Page and Copy  
(number of pages and copies to be printed)  
Original Page (number of pages of the original)  
Sender Info. (destination information)  
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the  
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.  
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK  
key to return to the original screen.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Displaying Send Job Log  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Log].  
Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press  
the U or V key to check the send log.  
Send Job Log:  
a b  
u
0004  
0003  
0002  
p
b
p
Broadcast  
0756545865  
Morgan@kyoc  
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right  
of each job.  
u
N
v
[ Detail ]  
u : Job completed normally  
v : Job error  
t : Job aborted  
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Send Job  
Status screen on page 7-4.  
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)  
to check the detailed information of the selected  
send log.  
0004 Detail:  
Result:  
OK  
C b  
1/9  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Result  
Accepted Time  
End Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)  
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)  
Destination  
7-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to  
the original screen.  
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information  
When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete  
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.  
When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the  
destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the  
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.  
Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original  
screen.  
Displaying Store Job Log  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
*********************  
7
1
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Log].  
Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. Press  
the U or V key to check the store queue.  
Store Job Log:  
a b  
u
0008  
0009  
0010  
b
b
Y
Scan  
maury’s data  
aaaa  
v
v
[ Detail ]  
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right  
of each job.  
u : Job completed normally  
v : Job error  
t : Job aborted  
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Store Job  
Status screen on page 7-6.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)  
to check the detailed information of the selected  
job.  
0009 Detail:  
Result:  
Error  
C b  
1/9  
10200  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Result  
Accepted Time  
End Time  
Job Name  
Job Type  
User Name  
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)  
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)  
Sender Info. (destination information)  
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to  
the original screen.  
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information  
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK  
key to return to the original screen.  
7-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Sending the Job Log History  
You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent  
automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.  
Displaying Job Log History Menu  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Count. menu  
appears.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
Report  
1
*********************  
2
3
Counter  
System  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
********************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
7
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Report].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
*********************  
Report  
2
3
Counter  
System  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.  
Report:  
Report Print  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Result Rpt Set.  
Job Log History  
[ Exit ]  
IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit  
acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings, the screen  
will display Copy, print, send, storing functions are  
restricted now. and return to the standby screen.  
Copy, print, send,  
storing functions  
are restricted now.  
23:00 - 08:30  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Status / Job Cancel  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Job Log History].  
Report:  
a b  
2
3
Admin Rpt Set.  
Result Rpt Set.  
4 Job Log History  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu  
appears.  
Job Log History: a b  
1
*********************  
Auto Sending  
2
3
Send History  
Destination  
[ Exit ]  
Setting the destination  
Set the destination to which job log histories are sent.  
Use the procedure below to set the destination.  
1
2
In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key  
to select [Destination].  
Job Log History: a b  
1
2
Auto Sending  
Send History  
3
*********************  
Destination  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.  
Destination:  
Confirmation  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
Register  
[ Exit ]  
Confirming Current Destination  
1
In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to  
select [Confirmation].  
Destination:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Confirmation  
2
Register  
[ Exit ]  
7-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status / Job Cancel  
2
Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.  
Dest. Confirm.:  
a b  
**************** ****  
p
Morgan@kyocera*mita  
N
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current  
destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on  
Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
[ Exit ]  
3
1
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic  
screen reappears.  
Registering Destination  
In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to  
select [Register].  
Destination:  
Confirmation  
a b  
1
2 Register  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
7
2
Press the OK key. Register appears.  
Register:  
Address Book  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
Address Entry  
To select a destination from the address book,  
press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and  
then press the OK key. This displays the address  
book. Select your desired destination.  
NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address  
book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28.  
To directly enter a destination, press the U or V  
key to select [Address Entry] and then press the  
OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the  
destination address directly.  
3
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Destination menu.  
Completed.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status / Job Cancel  
NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has  
been changed after you selected the destination from  
the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address  
Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on  
page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address.  
Register:  
Address Book  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
*Address Entry  
Automatic Job Log History Transmission  
This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs  
has been logged.  
Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.  
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key  
to select [Auto Sending].  
Job Log History: a b  
Auto Sending  
1
*********************  
2
3
Send History  
Destination  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears.  
Auto Sending:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
7-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs  
appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the number  
of jobs to be sent at a time.  
Jobs:  
D b  
(1 - 16)  
******16*jobs  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Job Log History menu.  
Manual Job Log History Transmission  
You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually.  
Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.  
1
In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key  
to select [Send History].  
Job Log History: a b  
Auto Sending  
Send History  
7
1
2
*********************  
Destination  
[ Exit ]  
3
2
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Send the job log  
history.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Enter destination.  
IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered, Enter  
destination is displayed. Refer to Registering  
Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired  
destination.  
3
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted. is  
displayed and the job log is sent to the registered  
destination before the screen returns to the Job  
Log History menu.  
Setting E-mail Subject  
Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail.  
Use the procedure below to set the subject.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
1
2
In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key  
to select [Subject].  
Job Log History: a b  
2
3
Send History  
Destination  
4 Subject  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. Subject appears.  
Subject:  
%printer  
B b  
*
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
5 for details on entering characters.  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
3
4
Enter the destination address.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Job Log History menu.  
7-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status / Job Cancel  
Pause and Resumption of Jobs  
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.  
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Print Job Status  
2
3
Send Job Status  
Store Job Status  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status].  
Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears.  
Print Job Status: a b  
0008  
r
*********************  
Copy  
r
0009  
0010  
r
maury’s data  
aaaa  
7
y
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]  
4
Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). Printing is  
paused.  
Pausing:  
0008 Copy  
a b  
r
*********************  
s
0009  
0010  
r
maury’s data  
aaaa  
s
s
y
[Resume ] [ Menu ]  
When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to  
resume printing.  
NOTE: When you press the Back key, a confirmation  
screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to  
resume printing.  
Resume paused jobs.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Canceling of Jobs  
For canceling jobs, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-31.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Status / Job Cancel  
Device/Communication  
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control  
devices depending on their status.  
Check of Device Status  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
Store Job Log  
Scanner  
a b  
7
8
*********************  
9
Printer  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [Scanner], [Printer]  
or [FAX].  
Press the OK key. This displays the status of the  
device selected in step 2.  
Scanner:  
Ready.  
b
b
Printer:  
Ready.  
FAX:  
b
Ready.  
[ Log ]  
4
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status  
menu.  
The items you can check are described below.  
Scanner  
The information (scanning, pausing, etc.) is displayed.  
Printer  
Information (waiting, printing, etc.) is displayed.  
7-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Status / Job Cancel  
FAX  
The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed.  
If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log  
menu appears. From this screen, you can check or  
print the transmission/reception history.  
Log:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Outgoing FAX Log  
2
3
Incoming FAX Log  
Outgoing FAX Rpt  
NOTE: If you are using a user management function,  
the menu for printing the transmission/reception history  
appears only when you have logged in as an  
administrator.  
Handling the Devices  
1
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status  
menu appears.  
Status:  
a b  
<
=
Paper Status  
Memory Card  
7
>
*********************  
USB Memory  
[ Pause ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].  
Press the OK key. This displays the status of the  
USB memory.  
USB Memory:  
Capacity:  
512.0MB  
C b  
1/3  
[Remove ]  
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other  
information items. The items displayed are as  
follows:  
Capacity  
Used Area  
Free Space  
When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key), a  
confirmation screen appears and you can remove  
the USB memory.  
USB memory can be  
safely removed.  
[ OK ]  
4
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status  
menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status / Job Cancel  
7-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Default Setting (System Menu)  
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on  
the operation panel.  
• Common Settings .........................................................8-2  
• Copy Settings..............................................................8-56  
• Sending Settings.........................................................8-62  
• Document Box Settings ..............................................8-66  
• Printer Settings ...........................................................8-69  
• Printing Reports/Sending Notice.................................8-81  
• Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................8-87  
• Date/Timer ..................................................................8-92  
•
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys).8-112  
• Restarting the System...............................................8-127  
• Network Setup ..........................................................8-128  
• Network Security.......................................................8-138  
• Interface Block Setting..............................................8-146  
• Security Level (Security Level setting)......................8-150  
• Optional Functions....................................................8-151  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Common Settings  
Common settings include;  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2  
Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2  
Default Screen …8-5  
Sound …8-6  
Display Bright. …8-7  
Original/Paper Settings …8-8  
Switching Unit of Measurement …8-27  
Error Handling …8-28  
Function Defaults …8-30  
Login Operation …8-55  
How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
NOTE:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
1
*********************  
Report  
2
3
Counter  
System  
[ Exit ]  
Switching the Language for Display [Language]  
You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally  
download messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information.  
8-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Default Setting (System Menu)  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
Press the U or V key to select [Language].  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. The Language menu appears.  
Language:  
*English  
a b  
*********************  
The available languages are as follows:  
1
2
3
Deutsch  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Français  
Español  
Italiano  
8
Nederlands  
Русский  
Português  
The optional languages are as follows:  
Optional language  
Turkish  
Message display  
Türkçe  
Greek  
Ελληνικά  
Polish  
Polski  
Czech  
Hungarian  
Finnish  
Hebrew  
Arabic  
Magyar  
Suomi  
Swedish  
Danish  
Svensk  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Norwegian  
Romanian  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Optional language  
Korean  
Message display  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
If you are using one of the optional languages, it is  
displayed in place of Portugues.  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select a language.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
8-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Default Screen  
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.  
The table below lists the available screens.  
Item  
Description  
Status  
The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown  
when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed)  
appears.  
Copy  
Send  
FAX  
The Copy screen (the screen shown when the  
Copy key is pressed) appears.  
The Send screen (the screen shown when the  
Send key is pressed) appears.  
The FAX screen (the screen shown when the  
FAX key is pressed) appears.  
Document Box  
The Document Box screen (the screen shown  
when the Document Box key is pressed)  
appears.  
8
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
Language  
Default Screen  
Press the U or V key to select [Default Screen].  
2
*********************  
3
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. Default Screen appears.  
Default Screen:  
Status  
*Copy  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
Send  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select the default screen.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Sound  
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.  
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting.  
Item  
Value  
Description  
Key  
Confirmation  
Off, On *  
Off*, On  
Off*, On  
Off, On*  
Emit a sound when the  
control panel are pressed.  
Job Finish  
Emit a sound when a print  
job is normally completed.  
Ready  
Emit a sound when the  
warm-up is completed.  
Warning  
Emit a sound when errors  
occur.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
2
Language  
Default Screen  
Press the U or V key to select [Sound].  
3
*********************  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. Sound appears.  
Sound:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Buzzer  
2
3
FAX Speaker  
FAX Monitor  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Buzzer].  
Press the OK key. Buzzer appears.  
Buzzer:  
1 Key Confirmation  
*********************  
a b  
Press the U or V key to select [Key Confirmation].  
2
3
Job finish  
Ready  
[ Exit ]  
8-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
9
Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears.  
Key Confirmation: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Buzzer menu.  
Display Bright.  
Set the brightness of the display.  
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
8
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Display Bright.].  
Press the OK key. Display Bright. appears.  
Display Bright.  
Darker -1  
*Normal 0  
:
a b  
3
4
*********************  
5
Lighter+1  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select the display  
brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Original/Paper Settings  
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.  
Custom Original Size Setup  
Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows.  
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.  
Input units  
Inch models  
Dimensions  
X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)  
Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Metric models  
X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)  
Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)  
Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
Press the U or V key to select [Custom Orig.Size].  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears.  
Size Entry(Y):  
(1.97 - 8.50)  
D b  
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).  
x
***7.00*"  
8-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
9
Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.  
Size Entry(X):  
(1.97 - 14.02)  
D b  
J
**11.23*"  
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Default Original Size Setup  
In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size  
to be used as the default value.  
Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Def. Orig. Size].  
Press the OK key. Def. Orig. Size appears.  
Def. Orig. Size: a b  
*Letter  
1
*********************  
q
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
q
q
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the paper size to be  
used as the default value.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.  
8-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print  
Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select  
paper.  
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.  
Input units  
Dimensions  
Inch models  
Cassette:  
X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)  
Paper Feeder PF-100: X: 5.83 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Y: 8.27 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)  
MP Tray:  
X: 2.75 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)  
Metric models Cassette:  
X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)  
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)  
Paper Feeder PF-100: X: 148 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)  
Y: 210 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)  
MP Tray:  
X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)  
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)  
8
Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source.  
Select media type for each paper size.  
Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock,Color,  
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1-8  
NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for Custom 1-8 for media type.  
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Custom  
PaperSize].  
Press the OK key. The Custom PaperSize menu  
appears.  
Custom PaperSize a b  
Cassette 1 Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Cassette 2 Size  
Cassette 3 Size  
7
Select the paper source in which you want to set  
the custom size and press the OK key. Size  
Entry(Y) appears.  
Size Entry(Y):  
(5.83 - 14.02)  
***11.49*  
D b  
D b  
a b  
x
"
8
9
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).  
Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.  
Size Entry(X):  
(4.13 - 8.50)  
***6.00*  
J
"
10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).  
11 Press the OK key. Mediatype appears.  
Media Type:  
*Plain  
1
*********************  
2
3
Transparency  
Rough  
12 Press the U or V key to select the media type for  
which you want to set the custom size.  
13 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.  
8-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes  
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3).  
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.  
Item  
Paper Size  
Description  
Letter, Legal, Statement*, Executive, Oficio II,  
A4, A5, A6*, B5, Folio, 16K, Custom  
2
Media Type  
Plain (105 g/m or less), Rough,  
2
Vellum (64 g/m or less), Recycled, Preprint***,  
Bond**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,  
2
Thick (106 g/m and more)**, High Quality,  
Custom 1-8**  
*
Cassette 1 only  
**  
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper  
Weight on page 8-17.  
***  
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to  
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.  
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.  
8
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Set.],  
[Cassette 2 Set.] or [Cassette 3 Set.].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Follow the steps below when you select the main  
unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar  
fashion when you select an optional cassette  
([Cassette 2 or 3])  
6
The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.  
Cassette 1 Set.: a b  
Cassette 1 Size  
1
*********************  
2
Cassette 1 Type  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size].  
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.  
Cassette 1 Size: a b  
*Letter  
1
*********************  
a
2
3
Legal  
Statement  
a
a
9
Press the U or V key to select the paper size.  
10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the  
Cassette 1 Set.: a b  
Cassette 1 Size  
Cassette 1 Set. menu.  
1
*********************  
2
Cassette 1 Type  
[ Exit ]  
11 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type].  
12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.  
Cassette 1 Type: a b  
*Plain  
1
*********************  
2
3
Rough  
Recycled  
13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type.  
14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.  
8-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray  
Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.  
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.  
Item  
Description  
Paper  
Size  
Standard Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,  
Sizes  
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K  
Others  
Select special standard sizes or custom size*.  
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,  
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,  
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,  
Youkei 2, Custom  
Size  
Entry  
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.  
Inch models:  
X: 2.75 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)  
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)  
Metric models:  
X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)  
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)  
8
2
Media Type  
Plain (105 g/m or less), Transparency, Rough,  
2
Vellum (64 g/m or less), Labels, Recycled,  
Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color,  
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope,  
2
Thick (106 g/m and more), High Quality,  
Custom 1-8**  
*
Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on  
page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size.  
**  
Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from  
Media Type.  
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to  
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.  
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17  
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].  
Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu  
appears.  
MP Tray Set.:  
MP Tray Size  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
MP Tray Type  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size].  
Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.  
MP Tray Size:  
a b  
<
=
16K  
Others  
*Size Entry  
a
>
*********************  
9
Press the U or V key to select the paper size.  
If you select [Others], you can select from  
additional paper sizes.  
Others:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*ISO B5  
a
2
3
Envelopr #10  
Envelope #9  
8-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
If you select [Size Entry], you can register a custom  
size. In the screen that appears, set the vertical  
size (Y) and horizontal size (X) of the paper using  
the numeric keys.  
Size Entry(Y):  
(5.83 - 14.02)  
D b  
x
***11.49*"  
10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP  
MP Tray Set.:  
MP Tray Size  
a b  
Tray Set. menu.  
1
2 MP Tray Type  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
11 Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type].  
12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.  
Cassette 1 Type: a b  
1
*********************  
*Plain  
2
3
Rough  
Recycled  
8
13 Press the U or V key to select the paper type.  
14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.  
Paper Weight  
Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.  
Paper types and weights  
z: Available ×: Not available  
Extra  
Heavy  
Paper Weight  
Light  
Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3  
Heavy 1  
Heavy 2  
Heavy 3  
Plain  
z
×
z
×
z
×
z**  
×
×
×
×
×
z
×
×
z
×
×
×
Transparency  
Rough  
z
z
×
z
z
×
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Vellum  
z
Labels  
z
z
×
z
×
z
×
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
z
z
×
×
×
z
z
z
z
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Extra  
Heavy  
Paper Weight  
Light  
Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3  
Heavy 1  
Heavy 2  
Heavy 3  
Cardstock  
Color  
×
×
×
×
z
×
z
×
z
×
z
×
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
×
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
Thick  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
z
z
×
z
z
×
z
z
×
z
z
×
Envelope  
High Quality  
Custom 1-8  
×
×
×
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.  
Item  
Description  
Duplex Prohibit  
Permit  
Duplex printing not allowed.  
Duplex printing allowed.  
Name  
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names  
should be not more than 16 characters.  
Selecting media type at multi purpose tray,  
the name after change will be displayed.  
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
8-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Media Type Set.].  
Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears.  
Media type Set.: K b  
Plain  
1
*********************  
2
3
Transparency  
Rough  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the paper type for  
which you want to make settings.  
Press the OK key. The menu for the selected paper  
type appears.  
Plain:  
Paper Weight  
a b  
*********************  
1
8
2
Print Density  
[ Exit ]  
9
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Weight].  
10 Press the OK key. The Paper Weight menu  
Paper Weight:  
a b  
*********************  
appears.  
1
Extra Heavy  
2
3
*Heavy 3  
Heavy 2  
11 Press the U or V key to select the weight of paper.  
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the menu for the selected paper  
type.  
Plain:  
Paper Weight  
a b  
1
2 Print Density  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
13 Press the U or V key to select [Print Density].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
14 Press the OK key. The Print Density menu  
Print Density:  
Medium Dark  
*Normal  
a b  
appears.  
2
3
*********************  
Medium Light  
4
15 Press the U or V key to select the print density.  
16 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the menu for the selected paper  
type.  
Plain:  
Paper Weight  
a b  
1
2 Print Density  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8],  
you can further set whether to enable or disable  
duplex and the name of the custom paper type.  
Custom X:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Paper Weight  
2
3
Print Density  
Duplex  
[ Exit ]  
17 Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].  
18 Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears.  
Duplex:  
Permit  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Prohibit  
[ Exit ]  
19 Press the U or V key to select whether to enable  
or disable duplex.  
20 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the menu for the selected custom  
paper type.  
Custom X:  
Paper Weight  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Print Density  
Duplex  
[ Exit ]  
21 Press the U or V key to select [Name].  
8-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
22 Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed.  
Name Entry:  
Osaka SD Kyocer  
C b  
Enter the name of the custom paper type.  
*S  
ABC  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-  
[ Text ]  
5 for details on entering characters.  
23 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the menu for the selected custom  
paper type.  
Custom X:  
Paper Weight  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Print Density  
Duplex  
[ Exit ]  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Default Paper Source  
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray.  
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional side feeder installed.  
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Def. PaperSource].  
Press the OK key. Def. PaperSource appears.  
Def. PaperSurce: a b  
*Cassette 1  
1
*********************  
2
3
Cassette 2  
Cassette 3  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the paper source to  
be used preferentially.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
8-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Media for Auto Selection  
When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by  
media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select  
[All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.  
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
8
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Media for Auto].  
Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears.  
Media for Auto:  
All Media Type  
*Plain  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
Transparency  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [All Media Type] or  
the paper type to be used for paper selection.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Special Paper Action  
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction  
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a  
case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed  
Priority].  
The table below lists the available settings and their details.  
Item  
Description  
Adj. PrintDirect  
Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little  
slower. Select this item to print on  
Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.  
Speed Priority  
Give the job speed top priority and  
disregard the paper orientation. Select this  
item when paper orientation is not  
important.  
If you select [Adj. PrintDirect], load paper according to the steps below.  
Example: copying on Letterhead  
Original  
Paper  
Finished  
Cassette  
Multi Purpose Tray  
Original  
Paper  
Finished  
Cassette  
Multi Purpose Tray  
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is  
supposed to be done, upward.  
8-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu  
appears.  
Orig./Paper Set.: a b  
Custom Orig.Size  
1
*********************  
8
2
3
Def. Orig. Size  
Custom PaperSize  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [SpcialPaper Act.].  
Press the OK key. SpcialPaper Act. appears.  
SpecialPaper Act.:a b  
*Adj. PrintDirect  
1
*********************  
2
Speed Priority  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Adj. PrintDirect] or  
[Speed Priority].  
SpecialPaper Act.:a b  
Adj. PrintDirect  
*Speed Priority  
1
2
*********************  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Preset Limit  
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.  
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Preset Limit].  
Press the OK key. The Preset Limit menu appears.  
Preset Limit:  
(1 - 999)  
**999*  
D b  
5
6
Press the U or V key to enter the number of  
copies.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
8-26  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Switching Unit of Measurement  
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.  
Use the procedure below to change the input units.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Measurement].  
8
Press the OK key. The Measurement menu  
appears.  
Measurement:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*inch  
2
mm  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [inch] or [mm].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Error Handling  
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for  
the errors are as follows.  
Duplexing Error  
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.  
Item  
Description  
Printed in 1-sided  
1-sided  
Display Error  
Error message to cancel printing is  
displayed.  
Paper Mismatch Error  
Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper  
type set in the paper source when printing from your computer.  
Item  
Description  
Printing continues.  
Ignore  
Display Error  
Error message to cancel printing is  
displayed.  
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Error Handling].  
8-28  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu  
appears.  
Error Handling:  
a b  
*********************  
1
DuplexPaperError  
2
PaperMismatchErr  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [DuplexPagerError].  
Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears.  
DuplexPaperError: a b  
*1-sided  
1
*********************  
2
Display Error  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the method to  
handle if duplex is disabled.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Error Handling menu.  
Error Handling:  
a b  
1
DuplexPaperError  
8
2 PaperMismatchErr  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
9
Press the U or V key to select  
[PagerMismatchErr].  
10 Press the OK key. PagerMismatchErr appears.  
PaperMismatchErr: a b  
1
*********************  
*Ignore  
2
Display Error  
11 Press the U or V key to select the method to  
handle paper mismatch.  
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Error Handling menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Function Defaults  
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.  
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as  
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.  
Orig.Orientation  
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.  
Item  
Description  
c Top Edge Top  
Select the original's top edge at the top.  
Select the original's top edge at the left.  
d Top Edge Left  
Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation.  
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].  
8-30  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.  
Orig.Orientation: a b  
1 c Top Edge Top  
2 Top Edge Left  
*********************  
*d  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [c Top Edge Top]  
or [d Top Edge Left] .  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Continuous Scan  
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.  
Item  
Description  
Off  
On  
Continuous scan not performed  
Continuous scan performed  
8
Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation.  
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].  
Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.  
Continuous Scan: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Original Image  
Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.  
Item  
Text+Photo  
Description  
Text and photos together.  
Photo  
Text  
For photos taken with a camera.  
Only text, no photos.  
for OCR  
Image quality suitable for OCR software.  
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
8-32  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].  
Press the OK key. Original Image appears.  
Original Image:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Text+Photo  
2
3
Photo  
Text  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Text+Photo],  
[Photo], [Text] or [for OCR].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
8
Scan Resolution  
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi,  
200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal).  
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution].  
Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.  
Scan Resolution: a b  
*200x100dpi Norm.  
1
*********************  
2
3
200x200dpi Fine  
200x400dpi S.Fin  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [200x100dpi  
Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin],  
[300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Color Selection  
Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.  
Color mode  
Full Color  
Description  
Scan document in full color.  
Grayscale  
Scan document in grayscale for smoother  
and finer finish.  
Black & White  
Scan document in black and white.  
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
8-34  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].  
Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.  
Color Selection: a b  
*Full Color  
1
*********************  
8
2
3
Grayscale  
Black & White  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Full Color],  
[Grayscale] or [Black & White].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
File Format  
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.  
File Format  
Description  
PDF  
TIFF  
XPS  
JPEG  
Send files in PDF format.  
Send files in TIFF format.  
Send files in XPS format.  
Send files in JPEG format.  
NOTE: Refer to page 5-10 for file formats.  
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [File Format].  
8-36  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. File Format appears.  
File Format:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*PDF  
2
3
TIFF  
XPS  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS]  
or [JPEG].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Density  
Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.  
Item  
Description  
Manual (Normal 0)  
Auto  
Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.  
Set to Auto density.  
8
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Density].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. Density appears.  
Density:  
a b  
1
Auto  
*********************  
2 *Manual  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Zoom  
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available  
default settings are shown below.  
Item  
Description  
100%  
Auto  
Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).  
Automatically reduce or enlarge the  
originals to match paper size/ sending size.  
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].  
8-38  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.  
Zoom:  
*100%  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Auto  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
File Name Entry  
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.  
can also be set.  
The table below lists the additional information available.  
Item  
Description  
None  
No additional information available.  
Adds date and time.  
8
Date  
Job No.  
Adds the job number.  
Job No. + Date  
Date + Job No.  
Adds the job number plus date and time.  
Adds date and time plus the job number.  
NOTE:  
•
•
Refer to page 4-18 and page 5-17 for name entry.  
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].  
Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter  
the document name (up to 32 characters).  
File name Entry: A b  
doc 1  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
7
Press the OK key. Additional Info appears.  
Additional Info.: a b  
*None  
1
*********************  
2
3
Date  
Job No.  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [None], [Date],  
[JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
Subject/Body  
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals  
by E-mail.  
NOTE:  
•
•
Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-21.  
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
8-40  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body].  
Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. Enter the  
e-mail subject (up to 60 characters).  
Subject Entry:  
K b  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu  
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
If you press the Back key, you can return to the  
Function Default menu.  
8
QRSTUVWXYZ  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
7
8
Press the OK key. Body Entry appears. Enter e-  
mail body text (up to 500 characters).  
Body Entry:  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu  
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
a b  
If you press the Back key, you can return to Subject  
Entry.  
QRSTUVWXYZ  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Collate  
Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
Collate  
Off  
On  
Collate not performed.  
Collate performed.  
NOTE: Refer to page 3-17 for Collate/Offset.  
Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Collate].  
Press the OK key. Collate appears.  
Collate:  
Off  
*On  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
7
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
8-42  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
EcoPrint  
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.  
Item Description  
Off  
On  
No EcoPrint performed.  
EcoPrint performed.  
NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint.  
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
8
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.  
EcoPrint:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Function Default menu.  
2 in 1 Layout  
Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are  
as follows:  
Item  
Description  
g L to R f T to B  
Arranges from left to right or top to bottom.  
Arranges from right to left.  
e R to L  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
8-44  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [2 in 1 Layout].  
Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears.  
2 in 1 Layout  
a b  
1
*********************  
*g  
L to R  
f
T to B  
2 e R to L  
9
Press the U or V key to select [g L to R f T to  
B] or [e R to L].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
8
4 in 1 Layout  
Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value are  
as follows:  
Item  
Description  
h Right then Down  
i Down then Right  
j Left then Down  
k Down then Left  
Arranges from upper left to right.  
Arranges from upper left to bottom.  
Arranges from upper right to left.  
Arranges from upper right to bottom.  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [4 in 1 Layout].  
Press the OK key. 4 in 1 Layout appears.  
4 in 1 Layout:  
a b  
1
*
h
Right then Down  
*********************  
2 i Down then Right  
3 j Left then Down  
9
Press the U or V key to select [h Right then  
Down], [i Down then Right], [j Left then Down]  
or [k Down then Left].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
8-46  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Border Line  
Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default value  
are as follows:  
Item  
Description  
None  
No border line.  
l Solid Line  
Draws solid border lines.  
m Dotted Line  
n Positioning Mark  
Draws dotted border lines.  
Puts a mark on the border line position.  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
8
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
Press the U or V key to select [Border Line].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
9
Press the OK key. Border Line appears.  
Border Line:  
a b  
*********************  
1
* None  
2 l Solid Line  
3 m Dotted Line  
Press the U or V key to select [ None], [l Solid  
Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
Orig. Binding  
Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is  
selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:  
NOTE: This setting is shown only when the optional document processor (DP-110) is installed.  
Item  
Description  
o Left/Right  
p Top  
Left/right binding  
Top binding  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
8-48  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Binding].  
Press the OK key. Orig. Binding appears.  
Orig. Binding:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*o  
Left/Right  
8
2 p Top  
9
Press the U or V key to select [o Left/Right] or  
[ p Top].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Finish Binding  
Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-  
sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:  
Item  
Description  
o Left/Right  
p Top  
Left/right binding  
Top binding  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
Press the U or V key to select [Finish Binding].  
8-50  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
9
Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears.  
Finish.. Binding: a b  
1
*********************  
*o  
Left/Right  
2 p Top  
Press the U or V key to select [ o Left/Right] or [p  
Top].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
Image Quality  
Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Select the default value in the range from  
[1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression).  
Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
8
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Image Quality].  
Press the OK key. Image Quality appears.  
Image Quality:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*1 Low(High Comp)  
2
3
2
3
9
Press the U or V key to select from [1 Low(High  
Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
Color TIFF Comp.  
Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine.  
Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
8-52  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Color TIFF Comp.].  
Press the OK key. Color TIFF Comp. appears.  
Color TIFF Comp.: a b  
*TIFF V6  
1
*********************  
8
2
TTN2  
9
Press the U or V key to select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
XPS FitTo Page  
Set the default value for XPS print range setting for printing an XPS document after enlarging or reducing it to  
the size that fits in the print area.  
Use the procedure below to set the default value for XPS print range setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].  
Press the OK key. The Function Default menu  
appears.  
Function Default: a b  
Color Selection  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scan Resolution  
FAX Resolution  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu  
appears.  
Detail Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
2 in 1 layout  
2
3
4 in 1 Layout  
Border Line  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page].  
Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.  
XPS FitTo Page:  
*Off  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
On  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.  
8-54  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Login Operation  
Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled.  
Item  
Description  
Use Numeric Key  
Use the numeric keys to select and enter  
characters.  
Select Character  
Enter characters by selecting them from  
the character palette that appears.  
Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
8
Common Settings: a b  
1 Language  
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Login Operation].  
Press the OK key. Login Operation appears.  
Login Operation  
:
a b  
1
*********************  
*Use Numeric Key  
2
Select Character  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Use Numeric Key]  
or [Select Character].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Copy Settings  
The following settings are available for copying functions.  
•
•
•
•
•
Photo Processing …8-56  
Paper Selection …8-57  
Auto Paper Selection …8-58  
Auto % Priority …8-58  
Select Key Set …8-60  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
Photo Processing  
Set the resolution for copying a photo.  
Item  
Description  
Dithering(Normal)  
Dithering(Rough)  
Sets the resolution to standard.  
Sets the resolution to low.  
Use the procedure below to set Photo Processing.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Copy].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
*********************  
Copy  
8
9
Printer  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.  
Copy:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Photo Processing  
2
3
Paper Selection  
AutoPaperSelect.  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Photo Processing].  
Press the OK key. Photo Processing appears.  
Photo Processing:a b  
*Dithering(Normal)  
1
*********************  
2
Dithering(Rough)  
8-56  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Dithering(Normal)]  
or [Dithering(Rough)].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Copy menu.  
Paper Selection  
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
Auto  
Automatically select the cassette  
containing paper in the same size as  
originals.  
Def. PaperSource  
Select paper source set by Default Paper  
Source (refer to page 8-22).  
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Copy].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
8
7
*********************  
Copy  
8
9
Printer  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.  
Copy:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Photo Processing  
2
3
Paper Selection  
AutoPaperSelect.  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].  
Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.  
Paper Selection: a b  
*Auto  
1
*********************  
2
Def. PaperSource  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Def.  
Paper Source].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Copy menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Auto Paper Selection  
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table  
below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
MostSuitableSize  
Select paper based on the current zoom  
and the size of the original.  
Same as OrigSize  
Select paper that matches the size of the  
original, regardless the zoom.  
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Copy].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
7
*********************  
8
9
Printer  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.  
Copy:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Photo Processing  
2
3
Paper Selection  
AutoPaperSelect.  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [AutoPaperSelect.].  
Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.  
AutoPaperSelect.:a b  
*MostSuitableSize  
1
*********************  
2
Same as OrigSize  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [MostSuitableSize]  
or [Same as OrigSize].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Copy menu.  
Auto % Priority  
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/  
zoom) is performed.  
8-58  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off.  
Item Detail  
Off  
On  
No zoom performed (copied in original size).  
Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.  
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Copy].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
7
*********************  
8
9
Printer  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.  
Copy:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Photo Processing  
2
3
Paper Selection  
AutoPaperSelect.  
[ Exit ]  
8
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Auto % Priority.].  
Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.  
Auto % Priority: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Copy menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Select Key Set  
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using  
copy functions.  
You can register one of the following functions to each key.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
None  
Paper Selection  
Collate  
Duplex  
Zoom  
Combine  
Original Size  
Orig.Orientation  
Original Image  
Density  
EcoPrint  
Continuous Scan  
File Name Entry  
JobFinish Notice  
Print Override  
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Copy].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
*********************  
Copy  
8
9
Printer  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.  
Copy:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Photo Processing  
2
3
Paper Selection  
AutoPaperSelect.  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].  
8-60  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.  
Select Key Set.: a b  
Left  
1
*********************  
2
Right  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].  
Press the OK key. This displays the function  
selection screen for the flexible key selected in step  
5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is  
selected.  
Left:  
Duplex  
*Zoom  
a b  
4
5
*********************  
Combine  
6
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the function you  
want to register to the flexible key.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Copy menu.  
8
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is  
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and  
This function is already registered. is displayed.  
This function is  
already registered.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Sending Settings  
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.  
•
•
Select Key Set …8-62  
DestinationCheck …8-64  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
Select Key Set  
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using  
sending functions.  
You can register one of the following functions to each key.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
None  
Color Selection  
Original Size  
Original Image  
Scan Resolution  
Sending Size  
Zoom  
Orig.Orientation  
Continuous Scan  
File Format  
File Name Entry  
Subject/Body  
JobFinish Notice  
FAX Resolution  
FAX Direct TX  
FAX Delayed TX  
FAX RX Polling  
Density  
Duplex  
FTP Encrypted TX  
8-62  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Send].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
8
Copy  
Printer  
9
*********************  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.  
Send:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Select Key Set.  
2
DestinationCheck  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].  
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.  
Select Key Set.: a b  
Left  
1
*********************  
8
2
Right  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].  
Press the OK key. This displays the function  
selection screen for the flexible key selected in step  
5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is  
selected.  
Left:  
a b  
2
Color Selection  
Original Size  
3
*********************  
4
Original Image  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the function you  
want to register to the flexible key.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Send menu.  
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is  
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and  
This function is already registered. is displayed.  
This function is  
already registered.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
DestinationCheck  
Set whether or not to display the destination confirmation screen before transmission. The setting items are as  
follows:  
Item  
Description  
Dest. Confirm.  
Sets whether or not to display the  
destination confirmation screen before  
transmission.  
Check New Dest.  
Sets whether or not to display the  
destination confirmation screen for a new  
destination.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Send].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
8
Copy  
Printer  
9
*********************  
Send  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.  
Send:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Select Key Set.  
2
DestinationCheck  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [DestinationCheck].  
Press the OK key. The DestinationCheck menu  
appears.  
DestinationCheck:a b  
Dest. Confirm.  
1
*********************  
2
Check New Dest.  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Dest. Confirm] or  
[Check New Dest.].  
Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen  
for the selected function.  
Dest. Confirm.: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
The screen shown is the one when Dest. Confirm  
is selected.  
2
On  
8-64  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Send menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Document Box Settings  
The following settings are available for Document Box.  
•
Select Key Set …8-66  
Select Key Set  
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when  
printing from or saving to a document box.  
You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document  
box.  
Print  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
None  
Collate  
Paper Selection  
Duplex  
File Name Entry  
JobFinish Notice  
Print Override  
Encrypted PDF  
Store  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
None  
Color Selection  
Original Size  
Original Image  
Scan Resolution  
Storing Size  
Zoom  
Orig.Orientation  
Continuous Scan  
File Format  
File Name Entry  
JobFinish Notice  
Density  
Duplex  
8-66  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Document Box].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
*********************  
Document Box  
<
=
Edit Destination  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Document Box menu  
appears.  
Document Box:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Sub Address Box  
Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].  
2
3
Select Key Set.  
Polling Box  
[ Exit ]  
4
Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.  
Select Key Set.: a b  
Print  
1
*********************  
2
Store  
8
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Print] or [Store].  
Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key  
selection screen for the function selected in step 5.  
The screen shown is the one when [Print] is  
selected.  
Print:  
Left  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Right  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].  
Press the OK key. This displays the function  
selection screen for the flexible key selected in step  
7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is  
selected.  
Left:  
None  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Collate  
Paper Selection  
9
Press the U or V key to select the function you  
want to register to the flexible key.  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Document Box menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is  
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and  
This function is already registered. is displayed.  
This function is  
already registered.  
8-68  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Printer Settings  
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following  
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Emulation Set …8-69  
EcoPrint …8-72  
Override A4/LTR …8-73  
Duplex …8-74  
Copies …8-75  
Orientation …8-76  
FormFeed Timeout …8-77  
LF Action …8-77  
CR Action …8-78  
Paper Feed Mode…8-79  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
8
Emulation Set  
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.  
Selection of emulation  
This machine can emulate the following printers:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Line Printer  
IBM Proprinter  
DIABLO 630  
EPSON LQ-850  
PCL6  
KPDL  
KPDL(Auto)  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
Copy  
Printer  
Send  
8
*********************  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Emuration Set.].  
Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears.  
Emulation Set.: a b  
5
6
PCL6  
KPDL  
7 *KPDL(Auto)  
*********************  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select the printer you want  
to emulate.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the  
operation after selecting the emulation is different from  
others.  
If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-71.  
If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-71.  
8-70  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation  
When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting  
is Off.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
2
In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select  
[KPDL].  
Emulation Set.: a b  
PCL6  
KPDL  
5
6
*********************  
KPDL(Auto)  
7
Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.  
KPDL Error Rpt: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation  
If you use the KPDL(Auto) emulation mode, KPDL and another emulation mode can be automatically switched  
according to the data (alternative emulation).  
For alternative emulation, you can select one of the following printers. The default setting is PCL6.  
•
•
•
•
•
Line Printer  
IBM Proprinter  
DIABLO 630  
EPSON LQ-850  
PCL6  
Also, as when you select [KPDL], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select  
[KPDL(Auto)].  
Emulation Set.: a b  
5
6
PCL6  
KPDL  
7 KPDL(Auto)  
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. Alt. Emulation appears.  
Alt. Emulation: a b  
3
4
DIABLO 630  
EPSON LQ-850  
5
*********************  
*PCL6  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select the printer for  
alternative emulation.  
Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.  
KPDL Error Rpt: a b  
1
*********************  
*Off  
2
On  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
EcoPrint  
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a  
problem.  
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
Printer  
7
8
*********************  
Send  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].  
8-72  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.  
EcoPrint:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
Override A4/LTR  
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table  
below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
On  
Off  
A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in  
size. The machine will use whichever size  
is in the paper source.  
8
A4 and Letter are not regarded as the  
same in size.  
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. The default setting is On.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
Printer  
7
8
*********************  
Send  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Override A4/LTR].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears.  
Override A4/LTR: a b  
Off  
2 *On  
*********************  
1
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
Duplex  
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
Finish  
Off  
No duplex mode  
Bind Long  
Edge  
Longer edge  
bound  
Bind Short  
Edge  
Shorter edge  
bound  
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
Copy  
Printer  
8
*********************  
Send  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].  
8-74  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. Duplex appears.  
Duplex:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
3
Bind Long Edge  
Bind Short Edge  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off], [Bind Long  
Edge] or [Bind Short Edge].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
Copies  
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.  
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
Printer  
7
8
*********************  
Send  
8
9
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Copies].  
Press the OK key. Copies appears.  
Copies:  
(1 - 999)  
*****999*copies  
D b  
5
6
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the  
default number of copies.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Orientation  
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.  
Portrait  
Printer  
Landscape  
Printer  
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
Printer  
7
8
*********************  
9
Send  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Orientation].  
Press the OK key. Orientation appears.  
Orientation:  
*Portrait  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Landscape  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Portrait] or  
[Landscape].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
8-76  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
FormFeed Timeout  
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling  
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine  
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.  
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Copy  
Printer  
7
8
*********************  
9
Send  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
8
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [FormFeed  
Timeout].  
Press the OK key. FormFeed Timeout appears.  
FormFeed TimeOut:*  
(5 - 495)  
b
******30*Sec.  
5
6
Press the U or V key to set the Form Feed  
Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds.  
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this  
value.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
LF Action  
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below  
shows the available settings. The default setting is LF Only.  
Item  
Description  
LF Only  
LF and CR  
Only line feed performed.  
Line feed and character return performed.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Item  
Description  
No line feed performed.  
Ignore LF  
Use the procedure below to specify a LF action.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
Copy  
Printer  
8
*********************  
Send  
9
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [LF Action].  
Press the OK key. LF Action appears.  
LF Action:  
*LF Only  
M b  
*********************  
1
2
3
LF and CR  
Ignore LF  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [LF Only], [LF and  
CR] or [Ignore LF].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
CR Action  
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The  
table below shows the available settings. The default setting is CR Only.  
Item  
Description  
CR Only  
Only character return performed.  
Character return and line feed performed.  
No character return performed.  
LF and CR  
Ignore CR  
8-78  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
Copy  
Printer  
Send  
8
*********************  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [CR Action].  
Press the OK key.  
CR Action:  
*CR Only  
a b  
*********************  
1
8
2
3
LF and CR  
Ignore CR  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [CR Only], [LF and  
CR] or [Ignore CR].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
Paper Feed Mode  
Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. The default setting is Auto.  
Item  
Description  
Auto  
Sets the paper feed direction automatically.  
Fixed  
Sets the paper feed direction the same as  
in the previous printing operation.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Printer].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
7
Copy  
Printer  
Send  
8
*********************  
9
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.  
Printer:  
Emulation Set.  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
EcoPrint  
Override A4/LTR  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Paper Feed Mode].  
Press the OK key. Paper Feed Mode appears.  
Paper Feed Mode: a b  
*Auto  
1
*********************  
2
Fixed  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Fixed].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Printer menu.  
8-80  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Printing Reports/Sending Notice  
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also  
be configured.  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.  
Printing Reports  
Printable reports are as follows.  
Menu map  
Outputs a menu map of this machine.  
Menu Map  
Firmware Version  
8
Status Page  
Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.  
Status Page  
Firmware Version  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Font List  
Check the font samples installed in the machine.  
Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Report].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Report  
1
*********************  
2
3
Counter  
System  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.  
Report:  
Report Print  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Admin Rpt Set.  
Result Rpt Set.  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Report Print].  
Press the OK key. The Report Print menu appears.  
Report Print:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Menu Map  
2
3
Status Page  
Font List  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Menu Map], [Status  
Page] or [Font List].  
8-82  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
7
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Print.  
Are you sure?  
The screen shown is the one when Status Page is  
selected.  
z
Status Page  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected  
report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Report Print menu.  
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Print, storing functions are restricted now. is displayed and the  
output is canceled.  
Service Status Page  
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status  
pages for maintenance purpose.  
Network Status Page  
8
Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.  
Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
<
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
=
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu  
appears.  
Adjust/Maint.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Denst. Adj.  
2
3
Send/Box Density  
Correct. Bk Line  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].  
Press the OK key. Service Setting appears.  
Service Setting: a b  
Service Status  
1
*********************  
2
3
Network Status  
New Developer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Service Status] or  
[Network Status].  
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Print.  
Are you sure?  
Network Status  
The screen shown is the one when Network Status  
is selected.  
z
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected  
report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.  
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Print, storing functions are restricted now. is displayed and the  
output is canceled.  
8-84  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Send Result Report  
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the  
available settings. The default setting is Error Only.  
Item  
Description  
No result report printed.  
Off  
On  
Result report automatically printed.  
Transmitted images can also be attached.  
Error Only  
Result report printed only when a  
transmission ends in an error. If two or  
more destinations are registered, the  
reports are printed only for the destinations  
with the errors. Transmitted images can  
also be attached.  
Use the procedure below to send a Result Report.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Report].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
*********************  
Report  
8
2
3
Counter  
System  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.  
Report:  
Report Print  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
Admin Rpt Set.  
Result Rpt Set.  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Result Rpt Set.].  
Press the OK key. The Result Rpt Set. menu  
appears.  
Result Rpt Set.: a b  
Send Result  
1
*********************  
2
3
FAX RX Result  
JobFinish Notice  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. The  
Send Result menu appears.  
Send Result:  
E-mail/Folder  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
FAX  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [E-mail/Folder]. E-  
mail/Folder appears.  
E-mail/Folder:  
a b  
1
2
Off  
On  
3 *Error Only  
*********************  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On] or [Error  
Only].  
Press the OK key. A Result Report is sent.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Send Result menu.  
8-86  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Adjustment/Maintenance  
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.  
•
•
•
•
Copy Denst. Adj. …8-87  
Send/Box Density …8-88  
Correct. Bk Line …8-89  
New Developer...8-90  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
Copy Denst. Adj.  
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.  
Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
<
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
8
=
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu  
appears.  
Adjust/Maint.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Denst. Adj.  
2
3
Send/Box Density  
Correct. Bk Line  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Copy Denst. Adj.].  
Press the OK key. Copy Denst. Adj. appears.  
Copy Denst. Adj.:a b  
Auto  
1
*********************  
2
Manual  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. This displays the density  
selection screen for the mode selected in step 5.  
The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is  
selected.  
Manual:  
a b  
3
-1  
* 0 Normal  
4
*********************  
5
+1  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the density from [-3  
Lighter] to [+3 Darker].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.  
Send/Box Density  
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels  
both in auto and manual density modes.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
<
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
=
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu  
appears.  
Adjust/Maint.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Denst. Adj.  
2
3
Send/Box Density  
Correct. Bk Line  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Send/Box Density].  
Press the OK key. Send/Box Density appears.  
Send/Box Density:a b  
Auto  
1
*********************  
2
Manual  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].  
Press the OK key. This displays the density  
selection screen for the mode selected in step 5.  
The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is  
selected.  
Manual:  
-1  
* 0 Normal  
a b  
3
4
*********************  
5
+1  
8-88  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select the density from [-3  
Lighter] to [+3 Darker].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.  
Correct. Bk Line  
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the  
optional document processor used.  
Paper feed  
direction  
8
The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
Off  
No correction performed.  
On(Low)  
Correction performed. The reproduction of  
the image becomes lower when using Off.  
On(High)  
Correction performed. Select this item if  
black streak remains after using On (Low).  
The reproduction of the image becomes  
lower when using On (Low).  
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to  
keep the default ([Off]).  
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
<
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
=
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu  
appears.  
Adjust/Maint.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Denst. Adj.  
2
3
Send/Box Density  
Correct. Bk Line  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Correct. Bk Line].  
Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears.  
Correct. Bk Line:a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
3
On(Low)  
On(High)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On(Low)] or  
[On(High)].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.  
New Developer  
When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
<
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
=
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu  
appears.  
Adjust/Maint.:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Denst. Adj.  
2
3
Send/Box Density  
Correct. Bk Line  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu  
appears.  
Service Setting: a b  
Service Status  
1
*********************  
2
3
Network Status  
New Developer  
[ Exit ]  
8-90  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [New Developer].  
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
New Developer.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is  
displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/  
Maint. menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Date/Timer  
Date/Timer settings include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date/Time …8-92  
Date Format …8-95  
Time Zone …8-97  
Summer Time …8-99  
Auto Error Clear …8-101  
Auto Sleep …8-103  
Auto Panel Reset …8-106  
Low Power Timer …8-108  
Unusable Time …8-109  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
Date/Time  
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and  
time set here will be displayed on the header.  
CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.  
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8-92  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in.  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Date Settings menu appears.  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Date/Time  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time].  
Press the OK key. The screen to enter the date of  
Date/Time appears.  
Date/Time:  
a b  
Year Month Day  
*2009* 01 01  
(Time Zone:Tokyo )  
8
7
8
Set the date.  
Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Year /  
Month / Day) you want to enter.  
Press the U or V key to set each item.  
Press the OK key. The screen to enter the time of  
Date/Time appears.  
Date/Time:  
a b  
Hour Min. Second  
****11 : 45: 50  
(Time Zone:Tokyo )  
9
Set the time.  
Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Hour /  
Min. / Second) you want to enter.  
Press the U or V key to set each item.  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial  
application (page 8-151) is running, the If you change  
Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable.  
Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the  
date/time, press [Yes](the Left Select key).  
8-94  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Date Format  
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.  
Use the procedure below to select the date format.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Date Settings menu appears.  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Date/Time  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Date Format]  
.
Press the OK key. Date Format appears.  
Date Format:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Month/Day/Year  
2
3
Day/Month/Year  
Year/Month/Day  
7
Press the U or V key to select [Month/Day/Year],  
[Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.  
8-96  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Time Zone  
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.  
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Date Settings menu appears.  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Date/Time  
2
3
Date Format  
Time Zone  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone].  
Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.  
Time Zone:  
a b  
1
*********************  
-12:00 Internati  
2
3
-11:00 Midway  
-10:00 Hawaii  
7
Press the U or V key to select your location.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.  
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize  
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not  
appear.  
8-98  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Summer Time  
Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date.  
Use the procedure below to set Summer Time.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Date Settings menu appears.  
Date Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
2
Date Format  
3
4
Time Zone  
Summer Time  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time].  
Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.  
Summer Time:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
7
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.  
8-100  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Auto Error Clear  
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto  
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.  
The following errors are automatically cleared.  
Cannot duplex print on this paper.  
Send error.  
Cannot connect to Authentication Server.  
Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled.  
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print.  
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan.  
Job not stored. Press [OK].  
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled.  
Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled.  
Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely.  
Scanner memory is full. Job is canceled.  
Print overrun.  
KPDL error.  
USB memory error. Job is canceled.  
No multi copies. Press [OK].  
8
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF  
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.  
Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto Err. Clear].  
Press the OK key. Auto Err. Clear appears.  
Auto Err. Clear: a b  
*Off  
1
*********************  
2
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Error Clear Timer  
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options  
are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 30 seconds.  
If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.  
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.  
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
8-102  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
8
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Err. Clear Timer].  
Press the OK key. Err. Clear Timer appears.  
Err. Clear Timer: D  
(5 - 495)  
b
******30*sec.  
7
8
Press the U or V key to set the Error Clear Timer.  
Set the amount of time before clearing errors in  
seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter  
this value.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Auto Sleep  
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on  
page 3-5 for Sleep Mode.  
Auto Sleep ON/OFF  
Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not. The default setting is Off.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.  
Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto Sleep].  
Press the OK key. Auto Sleep appears.  
Auto Sleep:  
*Off  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
8-104  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Sleep Timer  
If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and  
240 minutes (every one minute)  
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 15 minutes.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Timer].  
Press the OK key. Sleep Timer appears.  
Sleep Timer:  
(1 - 240)  
******15*min.  
D b  
7
Press the U or V key to set the Sleep Timer. Set  
the amount of time before entering the sleep state  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to  
enter this value.  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Auto Panel Reset  
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.  
NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings.  
Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF  
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.  
Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. The default setting is On.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
8-106  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Auto Panel Reset].  
Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears.  
Auto Panel Reset:a b  
Off  
*On  
1
2
*********************  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Panel Reset Timer  
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are  
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 90 seconds.  
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.  
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.  
8
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Panel Reset  
Timer].  
Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears.  
PanelReset Timer:D b  
(5 - 495)  
******90*sec.  
7
8
Press the U or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer.  
Set the amount of time before resetting the  
message display on the panel in seconds. You  
cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Low Power Timer  
You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode.  
Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments). The default setting is 2 minutes.  
For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4.  
Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
1
*********************  
Language  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
8-108  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Low Power Timer].  
Press the OK key. Low Power Timer appears.  
Low Power Timer: D b  
(1 - 240)  
*******2*min.  
8
7
8
Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the  
Low Power Timer. Set the amount of time before  
entering the low power state in minutes.  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
Unusable Time  
You can specify the prohibition period to use.  
Use the procedure below to set the unusable time.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Common Settings].  
4
5
User/Job Account  
User Property  
6
*********************  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
3
Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu  
appears.  
Common Settings: a b  
Language  
1
*********************  
2
3
Default Screen  
Sound  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and  
press the OK key.  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
4
The Timer Settings menu appears.  
Timer Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Err. Clear Timer  
2
3
Sleep Timer  
PanelReset Timer  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Unusable Time].  
Press the OK key. Unusable Time appears.  
Unusable Time:  
Off  
a b  
7
8 On  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [On].  
Press the OK key. Start Time appears.  
Start Time:  
Hour Min.  
***11*: 45  
(Current Time 11:45)  
a b  
9
Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the  
Start Time.  
8-110  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
10 Press the OK key. End Time appears.  
End Time:  
Hour Min.  
***07*: 00  
(Current Time 11:45)  
a b  
11 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the  
End Time.  
12 Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears.  
Unlock Code:  
(0000 - 0000)  
********99***  
a b  
13 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the  
unlock code.  
14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)  
Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be changed.  
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).  
Adding an Individual Destination  
A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as  
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).  
NOTE:  
•
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with  
administrator privileges.  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Edit Destination].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
;
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
<
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
=
2
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu  
appears.  
Edit Destination:a b  
Addressbook  
1
*********************  
2
Print List  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].  
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen  
appears.  
Addressbook:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
5
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu  
appears.  
Menu:  
Detail Rdit  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
4
Delete  
Add Address  
Search(Name)  
8-112  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Add Address].  
Press the OK key. Add Address appears.  
Add Address:  
Contact  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Group  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Contact].  
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for  
editing destinations.  
Detail:  
Contact Name  
Sally  
C b  
1/7  
NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has  
already been registered, the screen will display  
Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the  
Address Book.  
[ Edit ]  
10 Enter each item and then press the OK key.  
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Address Book list screen.  
8
Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter  
each item.  
Entering Contact Name  
1
2
Press the Y or Z key to select [Contact Name].  
Detail:  
Contact Name  
Sally  
C b  
1/7  
[ Edit ]  
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Contact Name:  
Sally  
A b  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
3
4
Enter the contact name.  
If creating a new contact name, the address  
number allocated to the destination is already  
entered.  
Press the OK key. The contact name is registered.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Entering E-mail Address  
1
2
3
Press the Y or Z key to display E-mail Address.  
Detail:  
C b  
p
E-mail Address: 4/7  
t_maury@kyoceramita.  
N
[ Edit ]  
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Address Entry:  
*
B b  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Enter the e-mail address.  
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the  
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to  
Specifying Destination on page 3-28.  
4
Press the OK key. The e-mail address is registered.  
Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address  
Folder (SMB) Address  
The table below explains the items to be entered.  
Item  
Description  
Max. No. of Characters  
Host Name*  
Host name or IP address of the  
sending computer  
64 chars  
Path  
Path to the folder used to save  
files  
128 chars  
E.g. "\User\ScanData"  
Login User Name User name for folder access  
For example,  
64 chars  
64 chars  
abcdnet\james.smith  
Login Password  
Password for folder access  
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the "Host name:  
port number" format. (E.g. SMBhostname: 140)  
8-114  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Folder (FTP) Address  
The table below explains the items to be entered.  
Item  
Description  
Max. No. of Characters  
Host Name*  
Host name or IP address of the  
sending computer  
64 chars  
Path  
Path to the folder used to save  
files  
128 chars  
E.g. "\User\ScanData"  
Login User Name User name for folder access  
For example,  
64 chars  
abcdnet\james.smith  
Login Password  
Encryption  
Password for folder access  
64 chars  
-
If secure communication is On,  
encryption method can be  
selected from Auto, DES, 3DES  
and AES.  
*
If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Hostname: port  
number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname: 140)  
8
1
Press the Y or Z key to display Folder(SMB) or  
Folder(FTP).  
Detail:  
Folder(SMB): 4/6  
Ntid7004  
C b  
G
[ Edit ]  
2
3
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Host Name(SMB): A b  
Osaka SD  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
Enter the host name.  
or  
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the  
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to  
Specifying Destination on page 3-28.  
Host Name(FTP): A b  
Osaka SD  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. Path appears.  
Path:  
A b  
SD3\report  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
5
6
Enter the path name.  
Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.  
Login User Name: A b  
Maury  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
7
8
Enter the login user name.  
Press the OK key. Login Password appears.  
Login Password: A b  
OOOOOOOOOOO  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
9
Enter the login password.  
10 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Check the connection.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new  
destination (page 8-64) is set to [On], screens to  
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.  
Enter the same host name and path name again and  
press the OK key on their respective screens.  
8-116  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a  
Dest. Confirm.: a b  
connection with the entered destination.  
p
b
b
Morgan@kyoceramitaN  
0667640000*********  
0667741234  
[ Exit ]  
If the connection is successful, Connected. is  
displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right  
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the folder  
(SMB/FTP) address is registered.  
If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is  
displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The  
screen shown in step 2 reappears. Check and re-  
enter the destination.  
Address Number  
Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address  
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and  
20 numbers for groups.  
8
1
Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number.  
Detail:  
C b  
Address Number: 6/6  
053  
[ Edit ]  
2
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Address Number: D b  
(001 - 120)  
*****053*  
3
4
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter  
the address number.  
Press the OK key. The address number is  
registered.  
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already  
registered, the screen will display This address number  
is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Adding a Group  
Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When  
adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.  
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in  
with administrator privileges.  
Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first. Up  
to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and  
SMB can be registered per a group.  
Use the procedure below to register a group.  
1
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Edit Destination].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
;
<
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
=
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu  
appears.  
Edit Destination:a b  
Addressbook  
1
*********************  
2
Print List  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].  
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen  
appears.  
Addressbook:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
5
6
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu  
appears.  
Menu:  
a b  
1
2
Detail/Edit  
Delete  
Add Address  
3
*********************  
Press the U or V key to select [Add Address].  
8-118  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
7
Press the OK key. Add Address appears.  
Add Address:  
Contact  
*Group  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Group].  
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for  
editing groups.  
Detail:  
Group Name:  
GUI Section  
C b  
1/4  
NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already  
been registered, the screen will display Registered  
numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book.  
[ Edit ]  
10 Enter each item and then press the OK key.  
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Address Book list screen.  
Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter  
each item.  
8
Entering Group Name  
1
2
Press the Y or Z key to display Group Name.  
Detail:  
Group Name:  
GUI Section  
C b  
1/4  
[ Edit ]  
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Group Name:  
A b  
GUI  
*
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
3
4
Enter the group name.  
If creating a new group name, the address number  
allocated to the destination is already entered.  
Press the OK key. The group name is registered.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Entering Group Member  
1
2
3
Press the Y or Z key to display Group Member.  
Detail:  
Group Member:  
30  
C b  
2/3  
[ Edit ]  
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays  
the list of destinations registered to the group.  
Group Member:  
a b  
*********************  
p
Sally  
b
G
Morgan  
Morgan  
[ Menu ]  
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group  
editing menu appears.  
Menu:  
a b  
1
2
Detail  
Delete  
Add Member  
3
*********************  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Add Member].  
Press the OK key. This displays the list of  
destinations registered in the Address Book.  
Contacts:  
a b  
*********************  
l
Fiala  
l
l
Maury  
Morgan  
NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered  
in the group, the screen will display Registered  
numbers exceeded. and return to the Group Member.  
[ Menu ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select the destination you  
want to add to the group.  
Press the OK key. This displays the sending  
address registered to the selected destination.  
l
b
p
G
Sally:  
0667643277  
sally@kyoceramita.  
Ntid7004  
a b  
N
[ Menu ]  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select the sending  
address.  
Press the OK key. The selected destination is  
added to the group and the screen returns to Group  
Member.  
8-120  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has  
already been registered to the group, the screen will  
display This address is already registered. and return  
to the screen of step 7.  
Deleting member from group  
To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below.  
1
While Group Member is displayed, press [Edit] (the  
Right Select key). This displays the list of  
destinations registered to the group.  
Group Member:  
a b  
*********************  
p
Sally  
b
G
Morgan  
Morgan  
[ Menu ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select the destination you  
want to delete.  
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group  
editing menu appears.  
Menu:  
Detail  
Delete  
a b  
8
1
2
*********************  
3
Add Member  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [Delete].  
Press the OK key. A confirmation message  
appears.  
Delete.  
Are you sure?  
z p Sally  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
6
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is  
displayed and the screen returns to Group  
Member.  
Entering Address Number  
Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address  
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers for individuals  
and 500 numbers for groups.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
1
2
Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number.  
Detail:  
Address Number: 4/4  
019  
C b  
[ Edit ]  
Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry  
screen appears.  
Address Number: D b  
(001 - 120)  
*****053*  
3
4
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter  
the address number.  
Press the OK key. The address number is  
registered.  
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already  
registered, the screen will display This address number  
is already registered. and return to the screen of step 2.  
Editing a Destination  
Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book.  
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.  
1
2
3
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Edit Destination].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Document Box  
Edit Destination  
;
<
*********************  
Adjust/Maint.  
[ Exit ]  
=
Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu  
appears.  
Edit Destination:a b  
Addressbook  
1
*********************  
2
Print List  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].  
8-122  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen  
appears.  
Addressbook:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select the destination you  
want to edit.  
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu  
appears.  
Menu:  
Detail Rdit  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
3
4
Delete  
Add Address  
Search(Name)  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Detail/Edit].  
Press the OK key. This displays the screen for  
editing the selected destination.  
Detail:  
Contact name  
Sally  
A b  
1/7  
8
The screen shown is the one when an individual's  
destination is selected.  
[ Edit ]  
9
Edit items as necessary.  
For how to edit each item, refer to Adding an  
Individual Destination on page 8-112 and Adding a  
Group on page 8-118.  
10 After completing editing, press the OK key. A  
Overwrite.  
confirmation screen appears.  
Are you sure?  
z p Sally  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Registered. is  
displayed and the screen returns to the Address  
Book list screen.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Adding a Destination on One-touch Key  
This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them.  
The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below:  
No.1  
No.12  
No.5  
No.2  
No.13  
No6  
No.3  
No.14  
No.7  
No.4  
No.15  
No.8  
No.16  
No.9  
No.17  
No.10  
No.21  
No.18  
No.11  
No.22  
No.19  
SHIFT  
No.20  
NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-7 for how to use them.  
Registering new destination  
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key.  
1
In the basic screen, press the one-touch key to  
which you want to register the destination and hold  
it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.  
Select Key No.: a b  
No. 1  
1
*********************  
2
No. 12  
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is  
pressed and held.  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select the key number to  
which you want to register the destination.  
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen  
appears.  
Addressbook:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
4
Press the U or V key to select the destination you  
want to register.  
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,  
refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-29.  
5
Press the OK key. The selected destination is  
registered to the one-touch key. Registered. is  
displayed and the screen returns to the basic  
screen.  
8-124  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Editing One-touch Key  
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key.  
Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key.  
1
In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where  
you want to edit the destination and hold it (2  
seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.  
Select Key No.: a b  
1
*********************  
No. 1  
2
No. 12  
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is  
pressed and held.  
[ Exit ]  
2
3
Press the U or V key to select the key number  
where you want to edit the destination.  
Press the OK key. The Key Edit appears.  
Key Edit:  
a b  
1
2
3
Edit  
Detail  
Delete  
[ Exit ]  
8
4
Press the U or V key to select [Edit].  
NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK  
key, you can delete the registration of the destination. If  
you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen that  
appears, Completed. is displayed and the registration  
of the destination is deleted.  
5
Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen  
appears.  
Addressbook:  
a b  
*********************  
k
Design  
l
l
Fiala  
Maury  
[ Menu ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select the destination you  
want to newly register.  
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,  
refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-29.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
7
8
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Overwrite.  
Are you sure?  
z
No. 1  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected  
destination is registered to the one-touch key,  
overwriting the previous one. Registered. is  
displayed and the screen returns to the basic  
screen.  
8-126  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Restarting the System  
Restart the printer without turning the main power  
switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation  
by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)  
Use the procedure below to restart the system.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
Report  
Counter  
1
2
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
8
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
Security Level  
Restart  
a b  
3
4
*********************  
Op Functions  
[ Exit ]  
5
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Restart].  
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Restart.  
Are you sure?  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The printer is  
restarted.  
If you press [No] (the Right Select key), the printer  
does not restart and the screen returns to the  
System menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Network Setup  
The following network settings are available.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
LAN Interface Setup …8-128  
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-129  
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-129  
NetWare Setup …8-130  
AppleTalk Setup …8-132  
Protocol Detail …8-135  
LAN Interface Setup  
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.  
Use the procedure below to select the interface.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
*TCP/IP Setting  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
5
Press the U or V key to select [LAN Interface].  
8-128  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
7
Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears.  
LAN Interface:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Auto  
2
3
10Base-Half  
10Base-Full  
Press the U or V key to select the desired LAN  
interface.  
The available LAN interfaces are as follows:  
Auto  
10Base-Half  
10Base-Full  
100Base-Half  
100Base-Full  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.  
8
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup  
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.  
Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-12 about the procedures.  
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup  
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off.  
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].  
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu  
appears.  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
TCP/IP  
1
*********************  
2
3
IPv4 Setting  
IPv6 Setting  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [IPv6 Setting].  
Press the OK key. IPv6 Setting appears.  
IPv6 Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
[ Exit ]  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.  
NetWare Setup  
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,  
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings is "Off".  
Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting.  
8-130  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Default Setting (System Menu)  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
8
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [NetWare].  
Press the OK key. NetWare appears.  
NetWare:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Frame  
Type appears. Press the U or V key to select the  
desired frame type.  
Frame Type:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Auto  
2
3
802.3  
Ether-II  
The available frame types are as follows:  
Auto  
802.3  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Ether-II  
802.2  
SNAP  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.  
For detailed information on restarting the system,  
refer to Restarting the System on page 8-127.  
AppleTalk Setup  
Select the Apple Talk network connection.  
Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-22 about the procedures.  
WSD Scan Setup  
Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On.  
Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is  
changed.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
3
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
8-132  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [WSD-SCAN].  
Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu appears.  
WSD-SCAN:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Network Settings menu.  
8
WSD Print Setup  
Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On.  
Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is  
changed.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [WSD-PRINT].  
Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu  
appears.  
WSD-PRINT:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Network Settings menu.  
8-134  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Protocol Detail  
Make other network related settings.  
Restarting the  
System*  
Item  
Description  
Default Setting  
NetBEUI  
LPD  
Selects whether or not to  
receive documents using  
NetBEUI.  
On  
×
Select whether or not to  
receive documents using  
LPD as the network  
protocol.  
On  
z
FTP (Server)  
FTP (Client)  
Select whether or not to  
receive documents using  
FTP.  
On  
On  
z
Select whether or not to  
×
send documents using FTP, Port number: 21  
and the number of the port  
to be used.  
8
Raw Port  
Select whether or not to  
receive documents using  
Raw Port.  
On  
z
LDAP  
Select whether or not to use Off  
×
LDAP.  
SNMP  
Select whether or not to  
communicate using SNMP.  
On  
Off  
z
SNMPv3  
SMB  
Set SNMPv3.  
z
Select whether or not to  
send documents using  
SMB, and the number of the  
port to be used.  
On  
×
Port number: 139  
SMTP  
(E-mail TX)  
Select whether or not to  
send e-mail using SMTP.  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
×
×
POP3  
(E-mail RX)  
Select whether or not to  
receive e-mail using POP3.  
HTTP  
Select whether or not to  
communicate using HTTP.  
z
z
HTTPS  
Select whether or not to  
communicate using HTTPS.  
SSL must be set to [On] in  
SSL Setting on page 8-138.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Restarting the  
System*  
Item  
Description  
Default Setting  
IPP  
Select whether or not to use Off  
z
IPP, and the number of the  
port to be used.  
Port number: 631  
IPP over SSL  
Select whether or not to use On  
IPP over SSL.  
z
SSL must be set to [On] in  
SSL Setting on page 8-138.  
*
z: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.  
×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.  
Use the procedure below.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
TCP/IP Settings  
1
*********************  
2
3
NetWare  
AppleTalk  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].  
8-136  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu  
appears.  
TCP/IP Settings: a b  
2
3
IPv4 Setting  
IPv6 Setting  
4
*********************  
Protocol Detail  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Protocol Detail].  
Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu  
appears.  
Protocol Detail: a b  
1
*********************  
NetBEUI  
2
3
SNMPv3  
FTP(Server)  
[ Exit ]  
9
Press the U or V key to select the item for which  
you want to make settings.  
10 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen  
FTP(Client)  
:
a b  
*********************  
On  
for the item selected in step 9.  
1
*Off  
8
The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is  
selected.  
2
11 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and [IPP]  
and press the OK key, a port number entry screen  
appears.  
Port Number  
:
D b  
(1 - 65535)  
*******21*  
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set the  
port number.  
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Network Security  
The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data.  
The following network security settings are available.  
•
•
•
SSL Setting …8-138  
SNMPv3 Setting …8-143  
IPSec Setting …8-144  
SSL Setting  
This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or  
not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings.  
SSL  
Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. The default setting is Off.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
3
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
8-138  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
4
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
Secure Protocol  
7
*********************  
8
9
Host Name  
LAN Interface  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].  
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.  
Secure Protocol: a b  
SSL  
1
*********************  
2
3
IPP Security  
HTTP Security  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [SSL].  
Press the OK key. SSL appears.  
SSL:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
8
2
On  
[ Exit ]  
9
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.  
IPP Security  
Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. The default setting is IPP/IPP over SSL.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
1
*********************  
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
Secure Protocol  
7
*********************  
8
9
Host Name  
LAN Interface  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].  
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.  
Secure Protocol: a b  
SSL  
IPP Security  
1
2
*********************  
HTTP Security  
[ Exit ]  
3
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [IPP Security].  
Press the OK key. IPP Security appears.  
IPP Security:  
IPP/IPP over SSL  
*IPPoverSSL only  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
9
Press the U or V key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL]  
or [IPPoverSSL only].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.  
HTTP Security  
Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. The default setting is HTTPS only.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
8-140  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
8
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
Secure Protocol  
7
*********************  
8
9
Host Name  
LAN Interface  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].  
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.  
Secure Protocol: a b  
1
2
SSL  
IPP Security  
3
*********************  
HTTP Security  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [HTTP Security].  
Press the OK key. HTTP Security appears.  
HTTP Security:  
HTTP/HTTPS  
*HTTPS only  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
9
Press the U or V key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or  
[HTTPS only].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.  
LDAP Security  
Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The default setting is Off.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
Secure Protocol  
7
*********************  
8
9
Host Name  
LAN Interface  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].  
8-142  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.  
Secure Protocol: a b  
2
3
IPP Security  
HTTP Security  
4
*********************  
LDAP Security  
[ Exit ]  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [LDAP Security].  
Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears.  
LDAP Security:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
3
LDAPv3/TLS  
LDAP over SSL  
9
Press the U or V key to select [Off], [LDAPv3/TLS]  
or [LDAP over SSL].  
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.  
8
SNMPv3 Setting  
Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below.  
Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-135 about the procedures.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
IPSec Setting  
Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off.  
Use the procedure below to make the setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Network Setting  
2
3
I/F Block Set.  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].  
Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu  
appears.  
Network Setting: a b  
4
5
WSD-SCAN  
WSD-PRINT  
6
*********************  
IPSec  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [IPSec].  
Press the OK key. IPSec appears.  
IPSec:  
*Off  
2
a b  
1
*********************  
On  
7
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].  
8-144  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule  
Setting appears. Press the U or V key to select  
[On] or [Off].  
Rule Setting:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Off  
2
On  
8
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Interface Block Setting  
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or  
optional interfaces.  
The following interface block settings are available:  
•
•
•
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)  
USB Device (USB interface setting)  
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)  
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)  
This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.  
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
Network Setting  
I/F Block Set.  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].  
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu  
appears.  
I/F Block Set.: a b  
USB Host  
1
*********************  
2
3
USB Device  
Option I/F  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [USB Host].  
8-146  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. USB Host appears.  
USB Host:  
*Unblock  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Block  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.  
USB Device (USB interface setting)  
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.  
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System], and press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
8
3
*********************  
System  
[ Exit ]  
When you are performing user management and  
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.  
Then, enter the user ID and password to log in, and  
press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
Login User Name: L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
The System menu appears.  
System:  
Network Setting  
I/F Block Set.  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].  
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu  
appears.  
I/F Block Set.: a b  
USB Host  
USB Device  
1
2
*********************  
3
Option I/F  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the U or V key to select [USB Device].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
6
Press the OK key. USB Device appears.  
USB Device:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Unblock  
2
Block  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the System menu.  
8-148  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)  
This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1). The default setting is Unblock.  
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.  
1
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [System].  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
2
Report  
Counter  
3 System  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
2
Press the OK key. The System menu appears.  
System:  
Network Setting  
I/F Block Set.  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Security Level  
[ Exit ]  
3
3
4
Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].  
8
Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu  
appears.  
I/F Block Set.: a b  
1
2
USB Host  
USB Device  
3
*********************  
Option I/F  
[ Exit ]  
5
6
Press the U or V key to select [Option I/F].  
Press the OK key. Option I/F appears.  
Option I/F:  
a b  
*********************  
1
*Unblock  
2
Block  
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or [Block].  
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the  
screen returns to the System menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Security Level (Security Level setting)  
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is  
no need for customers to use this menu.  
8-150  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Setting (System Menu)  
Optional Functions  
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.  
Op Functions  
Although nothing is currently displayed, when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed,  
the licenses can be set using this menu.  
8
OPERATION GUIDE  
8-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Setting (System Menu)  
8-152  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Maintenance  
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.  
• Cleaning........................................................................9-2  
• Toner Container ............................................................9-5  
OPERATION GUIDE  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Cleaning  
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.  
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.  
Glass Platen  
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild  
detergent.  
IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.  
Cleaning the Machine  
To avoid print quality problems, the interior of the machine must be cleaned with every toner container  
replacement.  
1
Open the front cover.  
9-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
2
Lift the developer unit together with the toner  
container out of the machine.  
3
Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding  
the green levers with both hands.  
NOTE: The drum unit is sensitive to light. Never  
expose the drum unit to light for more than five  
minutes.  
4
Place the drum unit flat on a clean, level surface.  
IMPORTANT: Do not place the drum unit on end.  
9
5
Use a clean, lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt  
away from the metal registration roller.  
IMPORTANT: Take care not to touch the transfer roller  
(black) during cleaning.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
6
On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner  
(green) back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the  
charger wire, then return it to its original position  
(CLEANER HOME POSITION ).  
IMPORTANT: Remove the fixing tape on the main  
charger cleaner before cleaning for the first time.  
After cleaning, make sure you restore the main charger  
cleaner to its home position.  
7
When cleaning is complete, return the drum unit to  
the original position.  
8
Return the developer unit to its position, aligning  
the guides at both ends with the slots in the  
machine. Then, close the front cover.  
9-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Toner Container  
When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner.  
Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may  
deteriorate output quality.  
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may  
cause burns.  
Toner Container Replacement  
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Turn the lock lever to the unlock position. Push the  
lock lever to the position marked by the arrow and  
pull out the toner container.  
9
NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag  
(supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later  
according to the local code or regulations for waste  
disposal.  
3
Take the new toner container out of the toner kit.  
Shake the new toner container at least 5 times as  
shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner  
evenly inside the container.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance  
4
Remove the label from the toner container.  
5
Install the new toner container in the machine.  
Push firmly on the top of the container at the  
positions marked PUSH, until you hear a click.  
6
Turn the lock lever to the lock position.  
7
Close the front cover.  
9-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine  
Prolonged Non-use  
If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet.  
We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible  
damage that may occur when the machine is used next time.  
Moving the Machine  
When you move the machine:  
•
•
•
Move it gently.  
Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine.  
Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine.  
WARNING: If you ship the machine, remove and pack the developer unit and drum unit in a plastic bag and  
ship them separately from the machine.  
9
OPERATION GUIDE  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
9-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Troubleshooting  
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.  
• Solving Malfunctions...................................................10-2  
• Responding to Error Messages ..................................10-5  
• Clearing Paper Jams ................................................10-11  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Solving Malfunctions  
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.  
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the  
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.  
Reference  
Page  
Symptom  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
The operation panel  
does not respond  
Is the machine plugged in?  
Plug the power cord into an AC  
outlet.  
—
when the main power  
switch is turned on.  
Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the  
Determine appropriate response to  
the message and respond  
accordingly.  
—
does not produce  
copies.  
Message Display?  
Is the machine in Sleep  
mode?  
Press the Power key to recover  
the machine from Sleep mode. The  
machine will be ready to copy  
within 45 seconds.  
3-5  
Blank sheets are  
ejected.  
Are the originals loaded  
correctly?  
When placing originals on the  
platen, place them face-down and  
align them with the original size  
indicator plates.  
2-44  
When placing originals in the  
optional document processor,  
place them face-up.  
2-46  
Printouts are too light. Is the machine in Auto  
Set the correct density level for  
auto density.  
—
Density mode?  
Is the machine in Manual  
Density mode?  
Select the correct density level.  
5-13  
When changing the default density  
level, adjust the density manually  
and choose the desired level.  
—
Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from  
within the toner container? side to side about several times.  
9-5  
9-5  
Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container.  
the addition of toner?  
Is the paper damp?  
Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28  
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?  
Disable EcoPrint mode.  
4-10  
Printouts are too dark. Is the machine in Auto  
Set the correct density level for  
auto density.  
—
Density mode?  
Is the machine in Manual  
Density mode?  
Select the correct density level.  
5-13  
When changing the default density  
level, adjust the density manually  
and choose the desired level.  
—
10-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Symptom  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Copies have a moire  
Is the original a printed  
Set the image quality to [Photo].  
5-12  
pattern (dots grouped photograph?  
together in patterns  
and not aligned  
uniformly).  
Printouts are not  
clear.  
Did you choose appropriate  
image quality for the original?  
Select appropriate image quality.  
5-12  
Printouts are dirty.  
Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document  
—
processor dirty?  
processor.  
Is the charger wire dirty?  
Clean the charger wire.  
—
—
Printouts are fuzzy.  
Images are skewed.  
Is the machine being used in Clean the charger wire.  
very humid conditions?  
Are the originals placed  
correctly?  
When placing originals on the  
platen, align them with the original  
size indicator plates.  
2-44  
2-45  
When placing originals in the  
optional document processor, align  
the original width guides securely  
before placing the originals.  
Is the paper loaded  
correctly?  
Check the position of the paper  
width guides.  
2-45  
2-28  
Paper often jams.  
Is the paper loaded  
correctly?  
Load the paper correctly.  
10  
Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper, turn it over, and 2-28  
type? Is it in good condition? reload it.  
Is the paper curled, folded or Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28  
wrinkled?  
Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper.  
10-11  
jammed paper in the  
machine?  
Printouts are  
wrinkled.  
Is the paper damp?  
Replace the paper with new paper. 2-28  
Is the paper set in a proper  
orientation?  
Change the orientation in which the  
paper is positioned.  
—
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Symptom  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Cannot print.  
Is the machine plugged in?  
Plug the power cord into an AC  
outlet.  
—
Is the machine powered on?  
Turn on the main power switch.  
3-2  
2-5  
Is the printer cable  
connected?  
Connect the correct printer cable  
securely.  
Was the machine powered  
on before the printer cable  
was connected?  
Power on the machine after  
connecting the printer cable.  
2-5  
3-2  
Is the print job paused?  
Press [Resume] to resume  
printing.  
7-19  
Documents are  
printed improperly.  
Are the application software  
settings at the PC set  
properly?  
Check that the printer driver and  
application software settings are  
set properly.  
—
While the operation  
panel was being used, locked?  
the keys locked up  
and do not respond  
when pressed.  
Is the operation panel  
Check the panel lock setting in  
COMMAND CENTER and change  
the setting if necessary.  
KYOCERA  
COMMAND  
CENTER  
Operation  
Guide  
Cannot print with USB Was the USB memory  
Format the USB memory with this  
machine.  
memory.  
formatted with a machine  
other than this machine?  
Is the USB host blocked?  
Select Unblock in the USB host  
8-146  
settings.  
Check that the USB memory  
is securely plugged into the  
machine.  
—
—
When displaying an  
image sent from the  
machine on the PC, an 200×400dpi Super Fine for  
image size is shrunk  
vertically or  
Have you selected  
200×100dpi Normal or  
Select a scan resolution other than 5-14  
200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi  
Super Fine when sending an  
image.  
the scan resolution?  
horizontally.  
USB memory not  
recognized.  
Check that the USB memory  
is securely plugged into the  
machine.  
—
—
Is the USB host blocked?  
Select Unblock in the USB host  
settings.  
8-146  
9-5  
Vertical streaks  
appear on prints.  
The inside of the machine  
may be dirty.  
Check the toner container and if  
necessary replace.  
Clean the charger wire.  
—
—
Check the main charger cleaner of  
the drum unit is in its original  
position.  
10-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Responding to Error Messages  
If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.  
Alphanumeric  
Reference  
Page  
Error Message  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Load paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper.  
2-29  
2-32  
1.  
of paper?  
Load paper in MP  
Tray.  
Is the paper of the selected  
size loaded in the multi  
purpose tray?  
Load the paper in the multi purpose  
tray which is of the size and type  
indicated on the Message Display.  
Add toner.  
–
–
Replace the toner container.  
9-5  
Cannot connect to  
Press the OK key and check the  
—
Authentication Server.  
following items:  
•
•
•
Registration to Authentication  
Serve  
Password and computer address  
for Authentication Server  
Connection of Network  
Cannot duplex print  
on this paper.  
Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper type.  
3-14  
media type that cannot be  
duplex printed?  
Press the OK key to print without  
using Duplex.  
10  
Incorrect account ID.  
Job is canceled.  
–
This job is canceled because it is  
restricted by Job Accounting. Press  
the OK key.  
—
Close front cover.  
Is there any cover which is  
open?  
Close the cover indicated on the  
control panel.  
—
Close Document  
Processor.  
Is the document processor  
open?  
Close the document processor.  
—
Is the top cover of the  
document processor open?  
Close the top cover of the document  
processor.  
2-45  
—
Job Accounting  
restriction exceeded.  
Cannot print.  
–
–
–
The job is canceled. Press the OK  
key.  
Job Accounting  
restriction exceeded.  
Cannot scan.  
The job is canceled. Press the OK  
key.  
—
—
Sub address/Polling  
box limit exceeded.  
Job is canceled.  
FAX box is full, and no further storage  
is available. The job is canceled.  
Press the OK key.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Error Message  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Incorrect Login User  
Name or Password.  
Job Is canceled.  
–
Enter correct login user name or  
password.  
—
Job Accounting  
restriction exceeded.  
Job is canceled.  
Is the acceptable printing  
count restricted by Job  
Accounting exceeded?  
The printing count exceeded the  
acceptable count restricted by Job  
Accounting. Cannot print any more.  
This job is canceled. Press the OK  
key.  
—
Machine failure.  
Call service.  
–
Internal error has occurred. Make a  
note of the error code displayed on  
the Message Display. Turn off the  
machine, unplug the power cord, and  
contact your Service Representative.  
—
—
Is Error code "C4200"  
displayed?  
Internal condensation has occurred  
as a result of a sudden change in  
temperature. Turn off the machine  
and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes,  
and then back on again. If this  
message still remains, turn off the  
machine, unplug the power cord, and  
contact your Service Representative.  
Memory is full.  
Print job cannot be  
processed  
–
–
Unable to continue the job as the  
memory is used up.  
—
Press the OK key to print the  
scanned pages. The print job cannot  
be processed completely.  
Press the STOP key to cancel the  
job.  
completely.  
Paper jammed.  
If a paper jam occurs, the machine  
will stop and the location of the jam  
will be indicated on the Message  
Display. Leave the machine on and  
follow the instruction to remove the  
jammed paper.  
10-11  
USB memory error.  
Job is canceled.  
–
–
This job is canceled. Press the OK  
key.  
—
Place original  
and press Start key.  
Remove originals from the document 2-46  
processor, put them back in their  
original order, and place them again.  
Press the Start key to resume  
printing.  
Press the STOP key to cancel the  
job.  
Remove original from Are there any originals left in Remove originals from the document  
—
document processor.  
the document processor?  
processor.  
10-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Error Message  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Scanner memory  
is full.  
Job is canceled.  
–
Scanning cannot be performed due  
to insufficient memory of scanner.  
The job is canceled. Press the OK  
key.  
—
Is the acceptable scanning  
count exceeded?  
Press the OK key to print, send or  
store the scanned pages. Press the  
STOP key to cancel printing,  
sending or storing.  
—
Send error.  
####  
–
An error has occurred during  
transmission. The possible error  
codes and their descriptions are as  
follows.  
1101: The server name of the SMTP  
server is not set correctly or the host  
name is incorrect when sending scan  
data to an FTP server. Use  
COMMAND CENTER and register  
the SMTP server name and the host  
name correctly.  
1102: The login user name is  
incorrect or the domain name has not  
been entered. Enter login user name,  
domain name and password  
correctly.  
—
1103: The network path name is  
incorrect or you do not have access  
to the folder specified. Use  
10  
COMMAND CENTER and register  
the path name correctly.  
1104: No recipient address. Enter E-  
mail address correctly.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Error Message  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Send error.  
####  
–
1105: E-mail - The SMTP protocol  
setting is turned off. Use COMMAND  
CENTER and turn on the SMTP  
protocol setting.  
Scan to PC (SMB) - SMB setting is  
turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER  
and turn on the SMB setting.  
Scan to PC (FTP) - FTP setting is  
turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER  
and turn on the FTP setting.  
1106: The sender address setting  
under E-mail: SMTP is not registered.  
Use COMMAND CENTER and  
register the sender address.  
2101, 2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, 2203,  
3101: The network cable is  
disconnected or the hub that it is  
connected to is not operating  
properly. Check the cable and the  
hub. Otherwise, the server name or  
the host name of the SMTP server is  
not set correctly. Use COMMAND  
CENTER and register the SMTP  
server name and the host name  
correctly.  
2204: The E-mail size exceeds the  
acceptable send data capacity.  
Decrease the size or resolution of the  
scanned data to be transmitted and  
resend the E-mail.  
5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7102, 720f:  
Turn the main power switch off and  
back on. If this error occurs several  
times, make a note of the displayed  
error code and contact your service  
representative.(Refer to the  
—
—
corrective action for the error  
message “ An error has occurred.”)  
9181: The scanned original exceeds  
the acceptable number of pages of  
999. Send the excess pages  
—
separately.  
Error occurred.  
Turn the main power  
switch off and on.  
–
–
System error has occurred. Turn the  
main power switch off and on.  
—
—
Incorrect account ID.  
The Account ID does not match.  
Check the registered Account ID.  
10-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Error Message  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Put down the receiver.  
The phone receiver is  
off the hook.  
–
—
Hang Up.  
File is not found.  
Job is canceled.  
–
–
The specified file is not found. The  
job is canceled. Press the OK key.  
—
Top tray is full of  
Paper.  
Remove the paper.  
Remove paper from the top tray, and  
press the OK key to resume the job.  
—
—
Unknown toner  
Installed.  
–
If the toner container was taken from  
a different machine of the same  
model while it was displaying the Add  
toner. message, ignore the message  
and use the toner.  
Unknown toner  
Installed. PC  
–
–
This message is displayed if the  
installed toner container's regional  
specification does not match the  
machine's.  
Insufficient memory.  
Cannot start the job  
Further scanning cannot be  
—
performed due to insufficient memory.  
Press the OK key to print the  
scanned pages. Press the Cancel  
key to cancel the printing job.  
10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes  
If an error lamp flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated  
on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1.5 seconds, check  
the following.  
Symptom  
Checkpoints  
Corrective Actions  
Reference Page  
Cannot send fax.  
Is the modular cord  
connected correctly?  
Connect the modular  
cord correctly.  
—
Is Permitted FAX No. or  
Permitted ID No.  
registered correctly?  
Check Permitted FAX  
No. and Permitted ID  
No..  
FAX Operation Guide  
Chapter 6 "Registering  
Permit FAX No." and  
"Registering Permit ID  
No."  
Has a communication  
error occurred?  
Check error codes in the FAX Operation Guide  
TX/RX Result Report  
and Activity Report. If  
the error code starts with  
"U" or "E", perform the  
corresponding  
Appendix  
"Error Code List"  
procedure.  
Is the destination FAX  
line busy?  
Send again.  
Send again.  
—
—
—
Does the destination  
FAX machine respond?  
Is there an error other  
than above?  
Contact your Service  
Representative.  
10-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Clearing Paper Jams  
If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop.  
Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below.  
Jam Location Indicators  
If a paper jam occurs, the error message displays the location of the jam.  
Paper Jam Location Indicator  
Paper Jam Location  
Reference Page  
Document processor (Option)  
Inside the machine  
MP Tray  
10-16  
10-14  
10-11  
10-12  
10-12  
10-15  
Cassettes  
Duplexer  
Rear cover  
Precautions with Paper Jams  
If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop.  
•
•
Do not reuse jammed papers.  
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.  
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.  
10  
•
Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be  
printed again.  
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger  
of getting burned.  
Online Help Messages  
When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help](the  
Press to display the next step or press  
Left Select key) to display the procedure to clear the jam.  
to display the previous step.  
Press the OK key to exit the online help message display.  
Multi Purpose Tray  
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
1
Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray.  
2
Reload the MP tray. Open and close the top cover  
to clear the error and the machine warms up and  
resumes printing.  
Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder  
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in paper cassette or paper feeder.  
1
2
Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder.  
Remove any partially fed paper.  
IMPORTANT: Do not try to remove paper that has  
already been partially fed. Proceed to Inside the  
Machine on page 10-14.  
NOTE: Check to see if paper is loaded correctly. If not,  
reload the paper.  
3
Push the cassette back in securely. The machine  
warms up and resumes printing.  
Duplexer  
Paper is jammed in the duplexer. Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below.  
1
Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the  
machine.  
10-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
2
Open the duplexer’s cover in front of the machine  
and remove any jammed paper.  
Open the duplexer’s cover at the rear of the  
machine and remove any jammed paper.  
3
Push the cassette back in securely, and open and  
close the top cover to clear the error. The machine  
warms up and resumes printing.  
10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Inside the Machine  
1
2
3
Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the  
machine. Remove any partially fed paper.  
Open the front cover, and lift the developer unit  
together with the toner container out of the  
machine.  
Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding  
the green levers with both hands.  
CAUTION: The fuser unit inside the machine is hot. Do  
not touch it, as it may result in burn injury.  
NOTE: The drum is sensitive to light. Never expose  
the drum unit to light for more than five minutes.  
10-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
4
5
6
If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by  
rollers, pull it along the normal running direction of  
the paper.  
Return the drum unit to its position, aligning the  
guides at both ends with the slots in the machine.  
Insert the developer unit together with the toner  
container, back into the machine. Close the front  
cover. The machine warms up and resumes  
printing.  
10  
Rear Cover  
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams of the rear cover.  
1
Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper  
by pulling it out.  
CAUTION: The fuser unit inside the machine is hot. Do  
not touch it, as it may result in burn injury.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
If the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit, open  
the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it  
out.  
2
Close the rear cover, and open and close the top  
cover to clear the error. The machine warms up and  
resumes printing.  
Optional Document Processor  
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor.  
Remove all of the originals from the document feed  
1
tray.  
2
Open the left cover of the document processor.  
3
Remove the jammed original.  
If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to  
remove, proceed to the next step.  
10-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
4
Open the document processor.  
5
Remove the jammed original.  
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from  
inside the machine.  
6
7
Close the document processor.  
Place the originals.  
10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
10-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Management  
This chapter explains the following operations.  
• User Login Administration...........................................11-2  
• Job Accounting .........................................................11-13  
• Checking the Counter ...............................................11-37  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
User Login Administration  
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user  
name and password for user authentication to log in.  
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified  
only by the machine administrator.  
First User Login Administration  
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.  
Enable user login administration. (page 11-2)  
T
Add a user.(page 11-6)  
T
Log out.(page 11-5)  
T
The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-5)  
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration  
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:  
Item  
Description  
Local  
Authentication  
User authentication based on user properties on  
the local user list stored in the machine.  
Network  
Authentication  
User authentication based on Authentication  
Server. Use a user property stored in  
Authentication Server to access the network  
authentication login page.  
11-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Management  
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account].  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
4
*********************  
User/Job Account  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The User/Job Account menu  
appears.  
11  
User/Job Account: a b  
User Login Set.  
1
*********************  
2
3
Job Account. Set.  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
4
5
Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.].  
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu  
appears.  
User Login Set.: a b  
User Login  
1
*********************  
2
Local User List  
[ Exit ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select [User Login].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
7
8
Press the OK key. User Login appears.  
User Login:  
*Off  
Local Authentic.  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
Netwk Authentic.  
3
Press the U or V key to select [Local Authentic.]  
or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key.  
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.  
If you select [Netwk Authentic.], enter the host  
name and domain name of the authentication  
server (up to 64 and 256 characters, respectively),  
and then press the OK key. Then, select the server  
type from [NTLM] or [Kerberos] and then press the  
OK key.  
Host Name:  
GUI  
A b  
*
ABC  
[ Text ]  
NOTE: If the login user name and password are  
rejected, check the following settings.  
•
•
•
Network Authentication setting of the machine  
User property of the Authentication Server  
Date and time setting of the machine and the  
Authentication Server  
If you cannot login because of the setting of the  
machine, login with any administrator registered in the  
local user list and correct the settings. If the server type  
is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase  
will be recognized.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the User Login Set. menu.  
11-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Login/Logout  
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time  
you use this machine.  
Login  
Log in using the procedure below.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
If the screen below appears during the operations,  
perform the following login operations.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
2
3
Press the OK key, enter the login user name, and  
then press the OK key.  
Press the V key to select [Login Password], press  
the OK key, enter the login password, and then  
press the OK key.  
4
Check the login user name and password are  
correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
11  
Logout  
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return  
to the login user name/login password entry screen.  
Auto Logout  
Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:  
•
When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep  
mode  
•
•
•
When auto sleep is activated  
When auto panel reset is activated  
When auto low power mode is activated  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Management  
Adding a User  
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default login user name). The table below  
explains the user information to be registered.  
Item  
Description  
User Name*  
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32  
characters).  
Login User  
Name*  
Enter the login user name to log in (up to 32  
characters). The same login user name cannot be  
registered.  
Login  
Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters).  
Password*  
Access Level*  
Account Name  
Select Administrator or User for user access  
privileges.  
Add an account where the user belongs. The user,  
who registered his/her account name, can log in  
without entering the account ID. Refer to Job  
Accounting on page 11-13.  
E-mail Address  
The user can register his/her E-mail address. The  
registered address will be automatically selected  
for subsequent operations that need any E-mail  
function.  
*
Mandatory at user registration.  
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is  
already stored. The following are the default user's properties.  
User Name:  
DeviceAdmin  
Login User Name: 2800  
Login Password: 2800  
Access Level:  
Administrator  
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your  
security.  
Use the procedure below to register a new user.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
Log in as a user with administrator rights.  
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
11-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
3
4
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User Login Set.].  
User/Job Account: a b  
1
*********************  
User Login Set.  
2
3
Job Account. Set.  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
6
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu  
appears.  
User Login Set.: a b  
User Login  
Local User List  
1
2
*********************  
IC Card Setting  
[ Exit ]  
11  
3
7
8
Press the U or V key to select [Local User List].  
Press the OK key. Local User List appears.  
Local User List: a b  
l DeviceAdmin  
*********************  
[ Menu ]  
9
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U  
or V key to select [Add User], and then press the  
OK key.  
Menu:  
a b  
1
2
Detail/Edit  
Delete  
Add User  
3
*********************  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
10 Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter  
the login user name in the next screen, and then  
press the OK key.  
User Name:  
*
T b  
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
11 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then  
l
User01:  
Exit  
a b  
press the OK key.  
1
*********************  
Detail  
Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see  
information of the registered users.  
2
12 In Local User List, press the U or V key to select  
Local User List: a b  
the added user and then press the OK key.  
l
l
DeviceAdmin  
Admin  
l User 1  
*********************  
[ Menu ]  
13 Press the Y or Z key to select [Login Password:],  
press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the login  
password, and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
Login Password: 3/6  
OOOOOOOOOOO  
C b  
[ Edit ]  
14 Enter the same login password to confirm and  
press the OK key.  
15 Press the Z key to select [E-mailAddress:], press  
[Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the e-mail  
address, and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
E-mailAddress: 4/6  
******@abcdef.jp  
C b  
p
[ Edit ]  
16 Press the Z key to select [Access Level:], press  
[Change] (the Right Select key), select the user  
access privilege, and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
Access Level:  
Administrator  
C b  
5/6  
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator,  
[Change] is not displayed.  
[ Change ]  
11-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
17 Press the Z key to select [Account Name:], press  
[Change] (the Right Select key), select the  
account, and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
Account Name:  
C b  
6/6  
k
KyoceramitaOsaka  
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and  
the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is  
not displayed.  
[ Change ]  
18 After entering the user information, press the OK  
key again.  
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to  
Local User List.  
Changing User Properties  
User information can be changed. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges.  
Use the procedure below to change the user properties.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
11  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User Login Set.].  
User/Job Account: a b  
User Login Set.  
1
*********************  
2
3
Job Account. Set.  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu  
appears.  
User Login Set.: a b  
User Login  
1
2 Local User List  
*********************  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Local User List].  
Press the OK key. Local User List appears.  
Local User List: a b  
l
*********************  
DeviceAdmin  
l
l
User1  
User2  
[ Menu ]  
The procedure differs depending on the details to  
be edited.  
Changing user information  
1
Press the U or V key to select the user whose  
information you want to change, and then press the  
OK key.  
Local User List: a b  
DeviceAdmin  
Admin  
l
l
*********************  
l
User1  
[ Menu ]  
2
In the same fashion as registering a new user,  
press the Y or Z key to select the desired item,  
press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change  
information, and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
User Name:  
User1  
C b  
1/6  
[ Edit ]  
3
4
Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.  
After completing changing the user information,  
press the OK key again.  
11-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
5
The overwrite confirmation screen appears.  
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user  
information is changed and the screen returns to  
Local User List.  
Deleting a user  
1
2
3
Press the U or V key to select the user you want  
to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select  
key).  
Local User List: a b  
DeviceAdmin  
Admin  
l
l
*********************  
l
User1  
[ Menu ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Delete] and then  
press the OK key.  
Menu:  
Detail/Edit  
Delete  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
Add User  
In the delete confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the  
Left Select key). The user is deleted and the  
screen returns to Local User List.  
Unknown login user name Job  
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent  
IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account  
ID is unknown.  
11  
The table below shows the available settings.  
Item  
Description  
Reject  
Permit  
The job is rejected (not printed).  
The job is permitted to be printed.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Unknown ID Job].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
2
User Login Set.  
Job Account. Set.  
3
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
5
Press the OK key. Unknown ID Job appears.  
Unknown ID Job: a b  
1
*********************  
*Reject  
2
Permit  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Reject] or [Permit].  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the User/Job Account menu.  
11-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Job Accounting  
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each  
account.  
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts.  
Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.  
Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.  
Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.  
Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.  
Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.  
First Job Accounting Setup  
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.  
Enable job accounting. (page 11-13)  
T
Add an account. (page 11-16)  
T
Log out. (page 11-15)  
T
Other users log in for operations. (page 11-15)  
11  
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting  
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Management  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
Job Accounting  
1
*********************  
2
3
Account. Report  
Total Accounting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Job Accounting].  
Press the OK key. Job Accounting appears.  
Job Accounting:  
*Off  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
On  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [On]. To disable job  
accounting, select [Off].  
Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Job Account. Set. menu.  
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu  
default screen, logout is automatically executed and  
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To  
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.  
11-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Login/Logout  
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.  
Use the procedure below to login and logout.  
Login  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
In the screen below, enter the account ID using the  
numeric keys and press the OK key.  
Account ID:  
b
*******************  
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the  
Clear key and enter the account ID again.  
[Counter ]  
If the entered account ID does not match the registered  
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter  
the correct account ID.  
By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key), you can  
refer to the number of pages printed and the number of  
pages scanned.  
When the screen to enter the login user name and  
password appears  
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to  
enter the login user name and password appears. Enter  
a login user name and password to log in. (Refer to  
Login/Logout on page 11-5.) If the user has already  
registered the account information, the account ID entry  
would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 11-  
6.)  
11  
2
Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.  
Logout  
When the operations are complete, press the Logout  
key to return to the account ID entry screen.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
Managing Accounts  
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.  
Item  
Description  
Account Name  
Account ID  
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).  
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits  
(between 0 and 99999999).  
Restriction  
This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the  
number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the  
Use of the Machine on page 11-22.  
Use the procedure below to register a new account.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
11-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
5
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
Each Job Account  
Account. List  
4
5
*********************  
Default Setting  
[ Exit ]  
6
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Account. List].  
Press the OK key. Account. List appears.  
Account. List:  
a b  
*********************  
k
UI R&D DEP.  
k
k
Osaka GUI Design  
Kyoceramita  
[ Menu ]  
8
9
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U  
or V key to select [Add Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Menu:  
a b  
1
2
Detail/Edit  
Delete  
Add Account  
3
*********************  
Enter the account name and press the OK key.  
Account Name:  
*
T b  
S
ABC  
[ Text ]  
11  
10 Enter the account code and press the OK key.  
Account ID:  
b
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered  
cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.  
*********S**********  
11 Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then  
k
1
Dep.01:  
Exit  
Detail  
a b  
*********************  
press the OK key.  
Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see  
information of the registered accounts.  
2
12 Account. List is displayed and the new account is  
added to the account list.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Managing Accounts  
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.  
Use the procedure below to manage accounts.  
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for details on entering characters.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE: If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left Select  
key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
6
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
Each Job Account  
Account. List  
4
5
*********************  
Default Setting  
[ Exit ]  
6
Press the U or V key to select [Account. List].  
11-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
7
Press the OK key. Account. List appears.  
Account. List:  
a b  
*********************  
k
UI R&D DEP.  
k
k
Osaka GUI Design  
Kyoceramita  
[ Menu ]  
The procedure differs depending on the details to be  
edited.  
Changing account information  
1
Press the U or V key to select the account whose  
information you want to change, and then press the  
OK key.  
Account. List:  
UI R&D DEP.  
Osaka GUI Design  
a b  
k
k
*********************  
k
Kyoceramita  
[ Menu ]  
2
Press the Y or Z key to select the item you want to  
change, press [Edit] (the Right Select key),  
change account information and restriction of use,  
and then press the OK key.  
Detail:  
Account Name:  
Osaka GUI Design  
C b  
1/7  
[ Edit ]  
NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to  
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22.  
3
4
Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.  
11  
After completing changing the account information,  
press the OK key again. A confirmation screen  
appears.  
Overwrite.  
Are you sure?  
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
5
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account  
information is changed. Registered. is displayed  
and the screen returns to Account. List.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Deleting an account  
1
2
3
4
Press the U or V key to select the account you  
want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right  
Select key).  
Account. List:  
UI R&D DEP.  
Osaka GUI Design  
a b  
k
k
*********************  
Kyoceramita  
k
[ Menu ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Delete].  
Menu:  
Detail/Edit  
Delete  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
Add Account  
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Delete.  
Are you sure?  
z k UI R&D DEPT.  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account is  
deleted.Completed. is displayed and the screen  
returns to Account. List.  
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts  
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying  
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to  
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-30 and  
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-35 for details.  
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
11-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set: a b  
Job Accounting  
1
*********************  
2
3
Account Report  
Total Accounting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].  
11  
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu  
appears.  
Default Setting: a b  
Apply Limit  
Copy/Print Count  
1
2
*********************  
Counter Limit  
[ Exit ]  
3
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Copy/Print Count].  
Press the OK key. Copy/Print Count appears.  
Copy/Print Count:a b  
Total  
*Split  
1
2
*********************  
10 Press the U or V key to select [Total] or [Split].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
11 Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Default Setting menu.  
Restricting the Use of the Machine  
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.  
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the  
Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-20.  
Restriction Items  
‹ [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count  
Item  
Detail  
Print Restriction  
(Copier)  
Limits the number of sheets used for copying.  
Print Restriction  
(Printer)  
Limits the number of sheets used for printing.  
Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes  
(Others)  
copying).  
Fax TX  
Restriction  
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (For FS-  
1128MFP only)  
‹ [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count  
Item  
Detail  
Print Restriction  
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying  
and printing.  
Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes  
(Others)  
copying).  
Fax TX  
Restriction  
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (For FS-  
1128MFP only)  
11-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
Applying Restriction  
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:  
Item  
Description  
Off  
No restriction given  
Counter Limit  
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments  
up to 9,999,999 copies.  
Reject Usage  
Restriction is applied.  
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.  
1
Follow steps 1 to 7 of Managing Accounts on page  
11-16.  
2
3
In Account. List, press the U or V key to select the  
account to which you want to set restriction of use,  
and then press the OK key.  
Account. List:  
UI R&D DEP.  
Osaka GUI Design  
a b  
k
k
*********************  
k
Kyoceramita  
[ Menu ]  
Press the Y or Z key to select the item to be  
restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select  
key).  
Detail:  
C b  
Print Restrict.: 4/6  
Off  
[ Edit ]  
11  
When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count, screen  
changes as shown in the left.  
Detail:  
C b  
Print Restrict.: 4/7  
Copier  
Off  
[ Edit ]  
4
Press the U or V key to select the desired  
restriction method and then press the OK key.  
Print Restrict.: a b  
1
*********************  
*Off  
2
3
Counter Limit  
Reject Usage  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit  
number of pages in the next screen, and then press  
the OK key.  
Limit Pages:  
(1 - 9999999)  
**123456*pages  
D b  
5
6
Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary.  
Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen  
appears.  
Overwrite.  
Are you sure?  
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
7
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The restriction of  
use is changed. Registered. is displayed and the  
screen returns to Account. List.  
Applying Limit of Restriction  
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below  
describes the action taken.  
Item  
Description  
Immediately *  
Subsequently  
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.  
Printing/scanning of the job continues but the  
subsequent job will be rejected.  
Alert Only  
Job continues while displaying an alert message.  
*
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.  
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
*
1
**  
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
U
*
s
*
e
*
r
*
/
*
J
*
o
*
b
**  
A
*
c
*
c
*
******  
ount  
2
3
11-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
4
5
Each Job Account  
Account. List  
6
*********************  
Default Setting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].  
11  
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu  
appears.  
Default Setting: a b  
1
*********************  
Apply Limit  
2
3
Copy/Print Count  
Counter Limit  
[ Exit ]  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Apply Limit].  
Press the OK key. Apply Limit appears.  
Apply Limit:  
Immediately  
*Subsequently  
a b  
1
2
*********************  
3
Alert Only  
[ Exit ]  
10 Press the U or V key to select [Immediately],  
[Subsequently] or [Alert Only].  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
11 Press the OK key.  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
the Default Setting menu.  
11-26  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Default Counter Limit  
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used.  
You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.  
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/  
Printer Counts on page 11-20.  
Available Settings  
‹ [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count  
Item  
Detail  
Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
used for copying.  
Print Restriction  
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
used for printing.  
Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
(Other)  
used for scanning (excludes copying).  
FAX TX  
Restriction  
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only)  
‹ [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count  
Item  
Detail  
Print Restriction  
Sets the default restriction on the total number of  
sheets used for copying and printing.  
11  
Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
(Other)  
used for scanning (excludes copying).  
FAX TX  
Restriction  
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets  
used for sending faxes. (For FS-1128MFP only)  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.  
1
2
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1 User/Job Account  
*********************  
2
3
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
6
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
1
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
1
2
Each Job Account  
Account. List  
3
*********************  
Default Setting  
[ Exit ]  
Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].  
11-28  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
7
Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu  
appears.  
Default Setting: a b  
Apply Limit  
1
*********************  
2
3
Copy/Print Count  
Counter Limit  
[ Exit ]  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select [Counter Limit].  
Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears.  
Counter Limit:  
a b  
*********************  
1
Copy Restriction  
2
3
Print Restrict.  
ScanRest.(Other)  
10 Press the U or V key to select the item for which  
you want to set the default restriction on the  
number of sheets, and then press the OK key.  
11 Use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction  
on the number of sheets, and then press the OK  
key.  
Copy Restriction:D b  
(1 - 9999999)  
**123456*  
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to  
Counter Limit.  
12 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions  
on the number of sheets.  
11  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Counting the Number of Pages Printed  
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job  
Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period  
of time.  
Types of the counts are as follows.  
Item  
Detail  
Printed Pages  
Displays the number of pages copied and printed,  
and the total number of pages used. You can also  
use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check  
the number of pages used.  
Scanned Pages  
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying,  
faxing* and other functions, as well as the total  
number of pages scanned.  
FAX TX Pages*  
FAX TX Time*  
Displays the number of pages faxed.  
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.  
*
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter  
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same  
time.  
Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
11-30  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
1
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set: a b  
Job Accounting  
1
*********************  
2
3
Account. Report  
Total Accounting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Total Accounting].  
Press the OK key. The Total Accounting menu  
appears.  
Total Accounting:a b  
Printed Pages  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scanned Pages  
FAX TX Pages  
[ Exit ]  
11  
8
Press the U or V key to select the function of  
which you want to check counts, and then press the  
OK key.  
If you select [Printed Pages] or [Scanned Pages],  
press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items.  
Copy/Print Pages:C b  
Copy: 1/3  
1234567  
9
After confirming the content, press the OK key. The  
screen returns to the Total Accounting menu.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
10 To reset the counter, press the U or V key to select  
Total Accounting:a b  
[Counter Reset].  
1
2
Printed Pages  
Scanned Pages  
3
*********************  
Counter Reset  
[ Exit ]  
11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Reset counter.  
Are you sure?  
z
Total JobAccounting  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is  
reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen  
returns to the Total Accounting menu.  
Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter  
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.  
Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
11-32  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
1
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set.:a b  
Each Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
Account List  
Default Setting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Each Job Account].  
Press the OK key. The Each Job Accounting menu  
appears.  
Each Job Account:a b  
Osaka GUI DESIGN  
k
*********************  
k
k
Kyoceramita  
UI R&D DEPT.  
11  
8
9
Press the U or V key to select the account of  
which you want to check counts.  
Press the OK key. A menu for the account appears.  
Osaka GUI DESIGN:a b  
Printed Pages  
1
*********************  
2
3
Scanned Pages  
Counter Reset  
[ Exit ]  
10 Press the U or V key to select the function of  
which you want to check counts, and then press the  
OK key.  
If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for  
which you want to check printed page counts, and  
then press the OK key. Press the Y or Z key to  
switch the counted items.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Y or Z  
key to switch the counted items.  
Copy/Print Pages:C b  
Copy: 1/3  
1234567  
Limit:1234567  
If the number of output sheets is restricted by an  
account management function, the upper limit on  
the number of output sheets is also displayed.  
11 After confirming the content, press the OK key. The  
screen returns to the menu for the account.  
12 To reset the counter, press the U or V key to select  
Osaka GUI DESIGN:a b  
[Counter Reset].  
1
2
Printed Pages  
Scanned Pages  
3
*********************  
Counter Reset  
[ Exit ]  
13 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.  
Reset counter.  
Are you sure?  
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
14 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is  
reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen  
returns to the menu for the account.  
11-34  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Printing an Accounting Report  
Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.  
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.  
When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count  
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.  
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
11  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [User/Job Account], and then press  
the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
User/Job Account  
4
*********************  
5
6
User Property  
Common Settings  
[ Exit ]  
3
If user login administration is disabled, the user  
authentication screen appears. Enter your login  
user name and password and then press [Login].  
For this, you need to log in with administrator  
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6 for  
the default login user name and password.  
Login User Name L b  
*******************  
Login Password:  
[ Menu ] [ Login ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management  
NOTE:  
•
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-5 for  
details on entering characters.  
•
If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user  
authentication method, press [Menu] (the Left  
Select key) to select the authentication destination.  
4
5
In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Job Account. Set.].  
User/Job Account:a b  
User Login Set.  
Job Account.Set.  
1
2
*********************  
Unknown ID Job  
[ Exit ]  
3
Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu  
appears.  
Job Account.Set: a b  
Job Accounting  
1
*********************  
2
3
Account. Report  
Total Accounting  
[ Exit ]  
6
7
Press the U or V key to select [Account. Report]  
and then press the OK key.  
In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left  
Select key). A job accounting report is printed.  
Print.  
Are you sure?  
z
Total JobAccounting  
[ Yes ] [ No ]  
11-36  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management  
Checking the Counter  
You can check the number of pages printed and scanned.  
The number is counted by the following items:  
Item  
Description  
Printed By Function  
Pages  
You can check the number of pages copied,  
faxed*, and printed, and the total number of  
pages used.  
By Paper  
Size  
You can check the number of pages printed  
for each paper size.  
Scanned Pages  
You can check the number of pages copied,  
faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the  
total number of pages used.  
*
FAX functions available only in FS-1128MFP.  
1
Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main  
unit operation panel.  
2
In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V  
key to select [Counter], and then press the OK key.  
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  
1
Report  
Counter  
2
*********************  
3
System  
[ Exit ]  
11  
3
Press the U or V key to select [Printed Pages] or  
[Scanned Pages], and then press the OK key.  
Counter:  
Printed Pages  
a b  
*********************  
1
2
Scanned Pages  
[ Exit ]  
If you select [Printed Pages], select [by Function] or  
[by Paper Size] in the next screen, and then press  
the OK key.  
Printed Pages:  
a b  
*********************  
1
by Function  
2
by Paper Size  
[ Exit ]  
OPERATION GUIDE  
11-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management  
4
5
Press the Y or Z key to check the count.  
Printed Pages:  
Copy:  
C b  
1/4  
1234567  
After completing checking the count, press the OK  
key. The screen returns to the menu for the  
account.  
11-38  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
• Optional Equipment .........................................Appendix-2  
• Character Entry Method...................................Appendix-5  
• Paper ...............................................................Appendix-9  
• Specifications.................................................Appendix-18  
• Glossary.........................................................Appendix-23  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optional Equipment  
Overview of Optional Equipment  
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.  
Document Processor  
Expansion Memory  
Paper Feeder  
Document Processor (DP-110)  
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform  
duplex copying and split copying.  
For document processor operation, refer to Loading  
Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-45.  
Paper Feeder (PF-100)  
Expansion Memory  
Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s  
double cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper  
capacity and loading method are the same as  
Cassettes 1.  
To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs  
and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory  
module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot  
provided on the main controller board. You can select  
additional memory module from 128, 256, 512, or 1024  
MB. The maximum memory size is 768 MB.  
Appendix-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed  
by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any  
damages caused by improper installation of expansion  
memory.  
Precautions for Handling the Memory Module  
Correct  
Incorrect  
To protect electronic parts, discharge static  
electricity from your body by touching a water pipe  
(faucet) or other large metal object before handling  
the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic wrist  
strap, if possible, when you install the memory  
module.  
Installing the Memory Module  
1
2
Turn off the machine and disconnect the power  
cord and interface cable.  
Remove the right cover with a piece of metal similar  
to coin.  
3
Remove the screws and the memory slot cover as  
shown in the figure.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
5
Remove the memory module from its package.  
Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the  
matching keys of the socket, carefully plug the  
memory module into the memory socket until it  
clicks in place. Then, push down the memory  
module to secure.  
CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the  
machine, make sure that the machine is switched off.  
6
7
Push down the memory module to secure.  
Reinstall the right cover.  
Removing the Memory Module  
Verifying the expanded memory  
To remove a memory module, remove the right cover  
and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then,  
carefully push out the two socket clamps. Ease the  
memory module out of the socket to remove.  
To verify that the memory module is working properly,  
test it by printing a status page.  
Appendix-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Entry Method  
In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters.  
Keys Used  
Use the following keys to enter characters.  
1
2
6
7
3
4
5
1. OK Key  
Press this key to finalize the entered character(s).  
2. Clear Key  
Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of  
the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.  
3. Back Key  
Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen.  
Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.  
Use these keys to select the character you want to enter.  
4. Cursor Keys  
5. Numeric Keys  
6. Reset Key  
Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen.  
7. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is  
displayed)  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Type of Characters  
To enter characters, the following three types are available:  
ABC  
123  
Symbols  
To enter alphabets.  
To enter numerals.  
To enter symbols.  
In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right  
Select key) to select the type of characters you  
want to enter.  
File name input:  
OsakaSD3  
*
123  
[ Text ]  
Current character type  
Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key),  
the character type switches as follows: ABC, 123,  
Symbol, ABC ...  
ABC  
[ Text ]  
123  
[ Text ]  
Symbols:  
a b  
[ Text ]  
NOTE: By pressing  
on the numeric keys while  
entering characters, you can directly display the  
Symbols screen.  
Appendix-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Characters  
After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters.  
Entering Alphabets and Numerals  
Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed.  
Key  
Entry mode  
Available characters  
. @ - _ / : ¯ 1  
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
1
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
a b c A B C 2  
2
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
d e f D E F 3  
3
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
g h i G H I 4  
4
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
j k l J K L 5  
5
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
m n o M N O 6  
6
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
p q r s P Q R S 7  
7
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
t u v T U V 8  
8
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
w x y z W X Y Z 9  
9
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
. , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0  
0
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
Switch between upper-/lowercase  
* or . (decimal point)*  
#
Alphabetic/Symbol  
Numeric  
*
'*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection,  
or '.' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character  
type is selected.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with  
the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it.  
If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character  
there, spaces are automatically entered in between.  
Entering Symbols  
Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the  
Symbols:  
a b  
numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. Use  
cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter  
and then press the OK key.  
[ Text ]  
Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings  
In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled, the character entry method may vary  
depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-55.)  
If a character palette appears on the screen, use  
Login User Name: a b  
Kyocer  
abcdefghijklmnopqrst  
cursor keys to select the desired character from the  
displayed characters, and then press the OK key to  
enter it.  
*
*
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
[ Next ]  
NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing  
numeric keys.  
Appendix-8  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper  
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.  
Cassette  
Supported types  
Supported paper sizes  
No. of sheets  
2
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,  
Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour),  
Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1  
to 8  
A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter,  
Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6,  
B6, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K,  
Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356mm  
(4-1/8 x 5-13/16 to 8-1/2 x 14 inches)  
250 (80g/m )  
Optional paper feeder  
Supported types  
Supported paper sizes  
No. of sheets  
2
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,  
Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour),  
Prepunched, High Quality, Custom 1  
to 8  
A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter,  
Oficio II, Executive, B6, ISO B5,  
Envelope C5, 16K, Custom (148 x 210  
to 216 x 356mm (5-13/16 x 8-5/16 to  
8-1/2 x 14 inches)  
250 (80g/m )  
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)  
Supported types  
Supported paper sizes  
No. of sheets  
2
Plain, , Preprinted, Labels, Bond,  
Recycled, Rough, Vellum,  
Letterhead, Color (Colour), High  
Quality, Custom 1 to 8  
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,  
Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,  
16k  
50 (80g/m )  
Other sizes:  
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm  
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to  
356 mm  
Thick paper  
A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter,  
Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6,  
B6, ISO B5, 16K  
1
Other sizes:  
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm  
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to  
356 mm  
Postcards  
Postcards (100 × 148 mm)  
15  
Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard)  
Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported types  
Envelopes  
Supported paper sizes  
No. of sheets  
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,  
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,  
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,  
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2  
1
Other sizes:  
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm  
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to  
356 mm  
Transparency (OHP film)  
Letter, A4  
1
Appendix-10  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Paper Specifications  
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers  
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given  
in this appendix.  
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.  
Supported Paper  
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality  
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.  
Basic Paper Specifications  
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent  
sections for further details.  
Criteria  
Specifications  
2
Weight  
Cassettes: 60 to 120 g/m  
2
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m  
Thickness  
0.086 to 0.110 mm  
±0.7 mm  
Dimensional accuracy  
Squareness of corners  
Moisture content  
Grain direction  
90° ±0.2°  
9%  
Long grain (paper supply direction)  
80% or more  
Pulp content  
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic  
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend  
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that  
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.  
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our  
specifications.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choosing the Appropriate Paper  
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.  
Condition  
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface  
or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor  
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and  
even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing  
unit.  
Ingredient  
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon.  
These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.  
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper  
content consists of cotton or other fibers.  
Supported Paper Sizes  
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.  
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner  
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.  
Cassette or Multi  
Multi Purpose Tray  
Purpose Tray  
B6 (128 × 182 mm)  
Letter  
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)  
Legal  
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")  
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")  
Statement *  
Executive  
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Oficio II  
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2")  
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)  
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)  
Hagaki (100 × 148mm)  
A4 (297 × 210 mm)  
A5 (210 × 148 mm)  
A6 (105 × 148 mm) *  
B5 (257 × 182 mm)  
Folio (210 × 330 mm)  
16K (273 × 197 mm)  
Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm)  
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)  
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)  
Size Entry (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)  
*
Except for the optional cassettes.  
Appendix-12  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Smoothness  
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,  
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.  
Basis Weight  
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square  
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut  
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be  
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight  
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or  
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.  
2
2
The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g/m for the cassettes and between 60 and 220 g/m  
for the multi purpose tray.  
Thickness  
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper  
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The  
proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.  
Moisture Content  
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the  
paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.  
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes  
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to  
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.  
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between  
4 to 6%.  
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.  
•
•
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.  
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to  
be used for a while.  
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the  
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete  
floors.  
•
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.  
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.  
Other Paper Specifications  
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers  
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,  
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the  
paper tray.  
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper  
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.  
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.  
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are  
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially  
careful when you cut the paper yourself.  
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should  
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.  
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms  
to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to  
test.  
•
•
•
•
Glossy paper  
Watermarked paper  
Paper with an uneven surface  
Perforated paper  
Special Paper  
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.  
The following paper and media can be used.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transparency (OHP film)  
Rough  
Vellum  
Labels  
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
Cardstock  
Color (Colour)  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
Envelope  
Thick  
High Quality  
Custom 1 to 8  
Appendix-14  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as  
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label  
paper.  
Choosing Special Paper  
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will  
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more  
likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a  
sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given  
below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture  
or specifications of special paper.  
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.  
Transparency (OHP film)  
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following  
conditions.  
Criteria  
Heat resistance  
Specifications  
Must withstand at least 190°C  
0.100 to 0.110 mm  
Polyester  
Thickness  
Material  
Dimensional accuracy  
Squareness of corners  
±0.7 mm  
90° ±0.2°  
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side  
facing the machine.  
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.  
Cardstock  
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan  
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled,  
straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki  
Burrs  
may cause jams.  
Burrs  
Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices).  
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by  
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such  
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and  
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Envelopes  
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.  
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.  
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before  
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.  
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until  
you are ready to use them.  
Keep the following points in mind.  
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive  
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive  
comes off in the machine.  
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for  
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.  
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.  
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in  
the top tray at once.  
Thick Paper  
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have  
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki  
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper  
with rough edges may cause jams.  
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray  
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.  
Label  
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.  
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the  
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or  
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.  
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.  
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the  
illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that  
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.  
The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is  
Top sheet  
used. This composition of labels may cause more  
problems.  
Adhesive layer  
Carrier sheet  
The label surface must be covered completely with the  
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of  
labels, resulting in a serious failure.  
Appendix-16  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from  
the carrier sheet before completing output.  
Allowed  
Not allowed  
Top sheet  
Carrier sheet  
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.  
Item  
Specifications  
Top sheet weight  
44 to 74 g/m²  
104 to 151 g/m²  
Basis weight  
(overall paper weight)  
Top sheet thickness  
Overall paper thickness  
Moisture content  
0.086 to 0.107 mm  
0.115 to 0.145 mm  
4 to 6 % (composite)  
Colored Paper  
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix. In addition, the  
pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).  
Preprinted Paper  
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 9 of the Appendix. The colored ink must  
be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a  
treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.  
Recycled Paper  
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness  
may be considered separately.  
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Machine  
Description  
Item  
FS-1028MFP  
FS-1128MFP  
Type  
Desktop  
Printing Method  
Supported Original Types  
Original Feed System  
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, single drum system  
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal)  
Fixed  
2
2
Paper  
Front  
60 to 120 g/m (Duplex: 60 to 120 g/m )  
Weight  
Cassette  
2
Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m , 230 µm (Cardstock)  
Tray  
Paper Type  
Front  
Cassette  
Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched,  
Letterhead, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)  
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,  
Tray  
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,  
Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8  
Paper Size  
Zoom Level  
Front  
Cassette  
Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4 (Duplex: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4)  
Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6 (Duplex: 7 1/4 × 10 1/2"/A5)  
Multi Purpose Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4  
Tray  
Minimum: 3 5/8 × 6 1/2"/C5  
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments  
Fixed magnifications:  
400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25%  
Printing  
Speed  
Simplex  
Duplex  
A4R/LetterR: 28/30 sheets/min  
B5R: 22 sheets/min  
Legal: 24 sheets/min  
A5R/A6R: 17 sheets/min  
A4R/LetterR: 14/15 sheets/min  
Legal: 12 sheets/min  
First Print Time  
(A4, feed from Cassette)  
When using the document processor: 8.7 ± 0.5 seconds  
When the document processor is not used: 6.9 ± 0.5 seconds  
Warm-up  
Time  
(22°C/  
Power on  
Low Power  
Sleep  
20 seconds  
15 seconds  
15 seconds  
71.6°F,60%)  
Appendix-18  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Description  
Item  
FS-1028MFP  
FS-1128MFP  
2
Paper  
Capacity  
Front  
Cassette  
250 sheets (80 g/m )  
2
Multi Purpose 50 sheets (80 g/m , plain paper, A4/Letter or less)  
Tray  
2
Output Tray Capacity  
Continuous Copying  
Image Write System  
Main Memory  
150 sheets (80 g/m )  
1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments)  
Semiconductor laser (1 beam)  
Standard: 256MB Maximum: 768MB  
Interface  
Standard  
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)  
USB Host: 1  
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)  
Option  
KUIO/W slot: 1  
Resolution  
600 × 600 dpi  
Monthly Duty  
Average: 1500pages Maximum: 20000pages  
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F  
15 to 80 %  
Operating  
Environment  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Altitude  
8,200 feet/2,500 m or less  
1,500 lux or less  
Brightness  
Dimension (W × D × H)  
19.4 × 16.1 × 14.4"  
494 × 410 × 366 mm  
19.4 × 16.9 × 17.6"  
494 × 430 × 448 mm  
Weight (without toner  
container)  
33 lb/15 kg  
40 lb/18 kg  
Space Required (W × D)  
25 3/16 × 25 7/16"  
640 × 646 mm  
Power Requirement  
120 V (60 Hz, more than 7.8 A)  
220 to 240V (50/60 Hz, more than 4.0 A)  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description  
Item  
FS-1028MFP  
FS-1128MFP  
Power  
Consump-  
tion  
During printing 479.9 W (U.S.A./Canada), 470 W  
(European countries)  
498 W (U.S.A./Canada), 484 W  
(European countries)  
During standby 83.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 83.4 W  
(European countries)  
91.8 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W  
(European countries)  
Low power  
mode  
82.6 W (U.S.A./Canada), 82.3 W  
(European countries)  
91.2 W (U.S.A./Canada), 90 W  
(European countries)  
Sleep mode  
8.0 W (U.S.A./Canada), 8.8 W  
(European countries)  
10.5 W (U.S.A./Canada), 11.1 W  
(European countries)  
Power off  
0 W  
Options  
Document processor, Paper feeder (up to 2 units)  
Printer  
Item  
Description  
Printing Speed  
First Print Time  
Same as Copying Speed.  
6.0 seconds or less  
(A4, feed from Cassette)  
Resolution  
Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600 dpi, 300 dpi  
Operating System  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Windows Server  
2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista x86 Edition,  
Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows 2008 Server, Windows Server 2008  
x64 Edition, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x  
Interface  
Standard  
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)  
USB Host: 1  
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)  
Page Description Language  
PRESCRIBE  
Appendix-20  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanner  
Item  
Description  
Operating System  
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows  
Server 2003, Windows Server 2008  
System requirements  
IBM PC/AT compatible  
CPU: Celeron 600Mhz or higher  
RAM: 128MB or more  
HDD free space: 20MB or more  
Interface: Ethernet  
Resolution  
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi  
JPEG,TIFF,PDF, XPS  
File Format  
Scanning Speed  
1-sided: B/W 20 Images/min  
Color 7 Images/min  
2-sided: B/W 11 Images/min  
Color 4 Images/min  
(A4 landscape, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)  
Interface  
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)  
USB2.0 (Hi-Speed USB)  
Network Protocol  
TCP/IP  
Transmission  
System  
PC transmission  
SMB  
FTP  
Scan to SMB  
Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL  
E-mail transmission SNMP Scan to E-mail  
1
TWAIN scan*  
WIA scan*  
2
*1  
*2  
Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista  
Available Operating System : Windows Vista  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Document Processor (option)  
Item  
Description  
Original Feed  
Method  
Automatic feed  
Sheet originals  
Supported  
Original Types  
Paper Size  
Maximum: Legal/A4  
Minimum: Statement/A5  
2
Paper Weight  
50 to 120 g/m  
2
Loading Capacity  
50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m ) maximum  
Dimensions  
22 3/4 × 21 × 7 1/8"  
455 × 338 × 93 mm  
(W) × (D) × (H)  
Weight  
3 kg or less  
Environmental Specifications  
Description  
Item  
FS-1028MFP  
2 minutes  
FS-1128MFP  
Time to Low Power mode (default  
setting)  
Time to Sleep mode (default setting)  
15 minutes  
Recovery time from Low Power mode 10 seconds or less  
Recovery time from Sleep mode  
Duplexing  
15 seconds or less  
Standard  
Paper supply capability  
100% recycled paper may be used.  
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.  
Appendix-22  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
AppleTalk  
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer  
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk  
network.  
Auto Form Feed Timeout  
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto  
form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no  
output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.  
Auto Paper Selection  
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing  
Auto Sleep Mode  
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a  
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.  
Bonjour  
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,  
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows  
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.  
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check  
that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only  
certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is  
registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP  
Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.  
Default Gateway  
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing  
computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP  
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and  
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large  
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being  
assigned.  
dpi(dots per inch)  
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
EcoPrint Mode  
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.  
Emulation  
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates  
operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).  
FTP(File Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and  
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.  
Grayscale  
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying  
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed  
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;  
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.  
IP Address  
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the  
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each  
number should be between 0 and 255.  
IPP  
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs  
to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view  
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the  
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.  
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)  
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.  
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray  
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto  
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.  
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)  
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on  
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of  
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and  
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.  
NetWare  
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.  
Appendix-24  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)  
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.  
PostScript  
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-  
functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,  
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level  
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in  
implementation technologies.  
PPM (prints per minute)  
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.  
Printer Driver  
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine  
is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the  
machine.  
Send as E-mail  
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be  
selected from the list or entered at each time.  
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail  
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.  
Status Page  
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper  
source settings.  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask  
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix  
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,  
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the  
network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address  
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix  
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the  
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP  
setting to Off.  
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)  
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each  
other over a network.  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Appendix-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet  
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under  
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to  
prioritize data transmission.  
TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)  
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers.  
The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is  
adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0  
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is  
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.  
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)  
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral  
devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions  
and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any  
application.  
Appendix-26  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2-in-1 Mode 4-11  
4-in-1 Mode 4-12  
Page Boundary Lines 4-13  
COMMAND CENTER 2-25  
Connecting  
Index  
LAN Cable 2-5  
Power Cable 2-7  
Numerics  
USB Cable 2-7  
Connection Method 2-3  
Continuous Scan  
1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-7  
A
Copy 4-15  
Send 5-16  
Copy  
Accessibility Appendix-23  
Adjusting Density 5-13  
Auto 3-10  
Adjusting Density 3-10  
Collate Copying 3-17  
Duplex Copying 3-14  
Offset Copying 3-17  
Originals 4-2  
Manual 3-10  
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-87  
Copy Density Adjustment 8-87  
Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-89  
Developer Refresh 8-90  
Send/Box Density 8-88  
AppleTalk Appendix-23  
Setup 2-22  
Auto Low Power Mode 3-4  
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-23  
Auto Sleep 3-5, Appendix-23  
Selecting Image Quality 3-11  
Setup 8-56  
Zoom Copying 3-12  
Copy Settings 8-56  
Auto Paper Selection 8-58  
Paper Selection 8-57  
Quick Setup Registration 8-60  
Copying Functions 4-1  
Counting the Number of Pages Printed  
Each Job 11-32  
B
Bonjour Appendix-23  
Bundled Items 2-2  
Buzzer 8-6  
Printing a Report 11-35  
Total Job 11-30  
Counting the Number of Pages  
Printed 11-30  
C
D
Cassette  
Loading Paper 2-29  
Paper Size and Media Type 8-13  
CD-ROM 2-2  
Changing Language 2-7, 8-2  
Cleaning  
Date/Timer 8-92  
Auto Panel Reset 8-106  
Date Format 8-95  
Date/Time 8-92  
Low Power Timer 8-108  
Time Zone 8-97  
Separator 9-5  
Slit Glass 9-2  
Default 8-30  
Color  
Collate/Offset 8-42  
Color Selection (Copy) 8-34  
Continuous Scan 8-31  
Density 8-37  
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Sel-  
ection 5-15  
Color mode  
Color Selection (Copy) 8-34  
Combine Mode  
EcoPrint 8-43  
E-mail Subject/Body 8-40  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
File Format 8-36  
File Name 8-39  
Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-18  
Entry  
Original Image 8-32  
Original Orientation 8-30  
Scan Resolution 8-33  
Zoom 8-38  
Body 5-18  
File Name 4-18, 5-17  
Subject 5-18  
Error Handling 8-28  
Error Messages 10-5  
Expansion Memory Appendix-2  
Default Gateway Appendix-23  
Default Screen 8-5  
Density Adjustment  
Copy 3-10  
Send 5-13  
Destination 8-112  
F
File  
Format 5-10  
Adding 8-112  
File Name 4-18  
FTP Appendix-24  
FTP Encrypted TX 5-23, 5-24  
Adding a Group 8-118  
Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-30  
Choosing from the Address Book 3-28  
Editing 8-122  
One-touch Key 8-124  
Search 3-28  
G
Grayscale 5-15, Appendix-24  
Sending to Different Types of Destinati-  
ons (Multi Sending) 3-30  
Device 7-20  
I
Checking Status 7-20  
Configuring 7-21  
Image Quality  
Copy 3-9  
DHCP Appendix-23  
Document Box 6-1  
Quick Setup Registration 8-66  
Document Processor Appendix-2, Appen-  
dix-22  
Send 5-12  
Interface Block 8-146  
IP Address Appendix-24  
IPP Appendix-24  
J
How to Load Originals 2-46  
Loading Originals 2-45  
Not Supported Originals 2-45  
Part Names 2-45  
Job  
Available Status 7-2  
Canceling 3-31, 7-19  
Checking History 7-8  
Checking Status 7-2  
Pause and Resumption 7-19  
Sending the Job Log History 7-13  
Job Accounting 11-13  
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 11-  
20  
Supported Originals 2-45  
dpi Appendix-23  
Duplex 3-14, 8-74  
E
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-24  
Copy 4-10  
Print 8-72  
E-mail  
Restricting the Use of the Machine 11-  
22  
Send as E-mail 3-21  
Emulation Appendix-24  
Selection 8-69  
Job Finish Notice 5-21  
Copy 4-16  
Send 5-21  
Index-2  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Raw Port 8-135  
SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-135  
SNMP 8-135  
K
KPDL Appendix-24  
TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-129  
TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-129, 8-132, 8-133  
L
Label Appendix-16  
LAN Cable  
O
Connecting 2-5  
Login 3-6, 11-5  
Operation Panel 1-2  
Option  
Logout 3-6, 11-5  
Low Power Mode 3-5  
Low Power Timer 8-108  
Document Processor Appendix-2  
Expansion Memory Appendix-2  
Overview Appendix-2  
Paper Feeder Appendix-2  
Optional Functions 8-151  
Original  
Loading in the Document  
Processor 2-45  
Placing on the Platen 2-44  
Original Orientation  
Copy 4-8  
M
Management 11-1  
Job Accounting 11-13  
User Login Administration 11-2  
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-24  
Paper Size and Media 2-41, 8-15  
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types  
of Destinations ) 3-30  
Document Processor 4-8  
Send 5-8  
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-44  
Original Size Selection  
Send 5-2  
N
NetBEUI Appendix-24  
NetWare 8-130, Appendix-24  
Setup 8-130  
Originals  
Copy 4-2  
Custom 8-8  
Setup 8-8  
Size Selection 4-2, 5-2  
Network  
Setup 2-12  
Network Cable 2-4  
Connecting 2-5  
Network Interface 2-4  
Network Security 8-138  
Network Setup  
P
Paper  
Appropriate Paper Appendix-12  
Auto Selection 8-23  
Before Loading 2-28  
Cassette 8-13  
Custom 8-11  
Default Paper Source 8-22  
Loading Envelopes 2-34  
Loading in the Cassettes 2-29  
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-32  
Multi Purpose Tray 8-15  
Setup 8-8  
AppleTalk 2-22  
FTP (Reception) 8-135  
HTTP 8-135  
HTTPS 8-135  
IPP over SSL 8-136  
LAN Interface 8-128  
LDAP 8-135  
LPD 8-135  
NetBEUI 8-135  
NetWare 8-130  
POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-135  
Size and Media 2-38, Appendix-9  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-14  
Specifications Appendix-11  
Weight 8-17  
Status Page 8-81  
Transmission Result Reports 8-85  
Product Library 2-2  
Paper Feeder Appendix-2  
Paper Jam 10-11  
Q
Cassette 1 10-12  
Quick Setup Screen  
Cassette 2 10-12  
Changing Registration 8-60, 8-62, 8-66  
Document Processor 10-16  
Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-15  
Jam Location Indicators 10-11  
Multi Purpose Tray 10-15  
Precaution 10-11  
R
Replacement  
Toner Container 9-5  
Waste Toner Box 9-5  
Resolution Appendix-19, Appendix-20  
Restarting the System 8-127  
Paper Selection 4-4  
Cassette 4-4  
Multi Purpose Tray 4-5  
Part Names 1-1  
Platen  
S
Placing Originals 2-44  
POP3 Appendix-25  
PostScript Appendix-25  
Power Cable  
Scan Resolution 5-14  
Default settings 8-33  
Send  
Connecting 2-7  
File Format 5-10  
Power Off 3-3  
Power On 3-2  
PPM Appendix-25  
Preparation 2-1  
Image Quality 5-12  
Original Size Selection 5-2  
Sending Size Selection 5-4  
Setup 8-62  
Preparing Cables 2-4  
Printer  
Sending  
Send as E-mail 3-21  
Send to Folder (FTP) 3-25  
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-25  
Sending E-mail 2-26  
Sending Functions 5-1  
Sending Settings 8-62  
Quick Setup Registration 8-62  
Sending Size Selection 5-4  
Sending to Different Types of Destinations  
(Multi Sending) 3-30  
Separator  
Setup 8-69  
Printer Driver Appendix-25  
Printer Settings 8-69  
Copies 8-75  
CR Action 8-78  
Duplex 8-74  
EcoPrint 8-72  
Emulation 8-69  
Form Feed Timeout 8-77  
LF Action 8-77  
Orientation 8-76  
Cleaning 9-5  
Override A4/Letter 8-73  
Printing 3-18  
Setting Date and Time 2-9  
Setup  
Printing from Applications 3-18  
Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-81  
Font List 8-82  
AppleTalk 2-22  
Copy 8-56  
Date/Timer 8-92  
Network Status Page 8-83  
Service Status Page 8-83  
NetWare 8-130  
Network 8-128  
Index-4  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer 8-69  
Send 8-62  
Printing Documents 6-2  
Removing 6-6  
Sleep 3-5  
Slit Glass  
Cleaning 9-2  
Saving Documents 6-4  
User Login Administration 11-2  
Adding 11-6  
SMTP Appendix-25  
Solving Malfunctions 10-2  
Specifications  
Changing Properties 11-9  
Enabling/Disabling 11-2  
Login 11-5  
Document Processor Appendix-22  
Environmental Specifications Appen-  
dix-22  
Machine Appendix-18  
Printer Appendix-20  
Logout 11-5  
Unknown login user name Job 11-11  
W
Waste Toner Box  
Replacement 9-5  
WIA Appendix-26  
WSD Scan 5-19  
Scanner Appendix-21  
Specifying Destination 3-28  
Status / Job Cancel 7-1  
Status Page 8-81, Appendix-25  
Subnet Mask Appendix-25  
Switching the Language 2-7, 8-2  
Switching Unit of Measurement 8-27  
System Menu 8-1  
X
XPS  
File formats 5-10, 8-36  
Printing documents stored in Remova-  
ble USB Memory 6-2  
T
Saving documents to Removable USB  
Memory 6-4  
TCP/IP Appendix-25  
Toner Container  
Replacement 9-5  
TWAIN Appendix-26  
Z
Zoom Copying  
Auto Zoom 3-12  
Manual Zoom 3-12  
Preset Zoom 3-12  
Zoom Mode  
U
Unusable Time 8-109  
USB Appendix-26  
USB Cable  
Connecting 2-7  
USB Interface 2-4  
USB Memory  
Copy 3-12, 5-6  
Send 5-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index-6  
OPERATION GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Edition 2009.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

La Crosse Technology Watch WT 3181bz User Manual
Land Pride Offroad Vehicle 720 051M User Manual
LG Electronics Computer Monitor W2261VG User Manual
Lindy Network Card Wireless LAN 11 PCMCIA Card User Manual
Magnadyne Security Camera C125 Black User Manual
Magnasonic Flat Panel Television MLD1525 User Manual
Makita Mixer UT1305 User Manual
Marantz DVD Player DV4100 User Manual
Maytag Range MER6755AAS26 User Manual
Meade Telescope 114 EQ ASB User Manual